Toyota 2012 Tacoma Owner Manual

PDF

Document

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

Interior and exterior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

Vehicle specifications

Detailed vehicle information.

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners and camper information.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

1 -1 . K e y inform a t ion

Ke ys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without engine immobilizer system

Master keys

Key number plate

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system

Master keys

Key number plate

■ Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (

→

P. 534)

1-1. Key information

NOTICE

■ To prevent key damage (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)

● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

1 -2 . Ope ning, c losing a nd loc k ing t he doors

Wire le ss re m ot e c ont rol

∗

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Sounds alarm

(push and hold)

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

■ Panic mode

When is pushed for longer than about

1 second, an alarm will sound for about

60 seconds and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

■ Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

∗

: If equipped

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Wireless remote control depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the key is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.

(

→

P. 472)

■ If the wireless remote control does not operate

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (

→

P. 39)

■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Conditions affecting operation

The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.

● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device

● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity

● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby

● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer

■ When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a wireless remote control onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the wireless remote control while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying a wireless remote control in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the wireless remote control to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

(Customizable features

→

P. 583)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Certification for wireless remote control

MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: GQ43VT20T

Receiver: GQ4-34R

IC (Canada) IDs:

Transmitter: 1470A-1T

Receiver: 1470A-6R

MADE IN U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1 -2 . Ope ning, c losing a nd loc k ing t he doors

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

■ Wireless remote control (if equipped)

→

P. 36

■ Key

Regular Cab models

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Access Cab and Double Cab models

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Turning the key a single time in the driver’s door unlocks the driver’s door, and turning the key again unlocks the other doors.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■ Door lock switch (if equipped)

Driver’s door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Passenger’s door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

■ Inside door lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Pulling the inside handle can open the front door even if the inside door lock button is in the lock position.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

Vehicles with power door lock system

The door cannot be locked if a front door is open and the key is in the engine switch.

Rear door child-protector lock (Double Cab models only)

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set.

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

■ Key reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Always use a seat belt.

● Always lock all doors.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.

1 -2 . Ope ning, c losing a nd loc k ing t he doors

Ac c e ss doors (Ac c e ss Ca b m ode ls only)

The access door (rear door) can be opened using the inside handle.

Open the front door widely

Pull (from the outside) or push (from the inside) the inside handle of the access door.

Open the access door

You can open and close the access door only when the front door is widely opened.

NOTICE

■ When opening or closing the front door and access door

The front door and access door could be damaged if they hit each other when being opened or closed.

1 -2 . Ope ning, c losing a nd loc k ing t he doors

Ta ilga t e

The tailgate can be opened.

Pull the handle

Open the tailgate slowly

The support cables will hold the tailgate horizontal.

After closing the tailgate, try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.

Removing the tailgate

■ Before removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor system)

These connector covers are used when removing the tailgate, to prevent the back-up camera wire harness connectors from being contaminated.

Connector cover (Gray)

Connector cover (White)

Store the connector covers in the glove box in a plastic bag when not using.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

To disconnect the wire harness connectors ( and ), press and hold the lock of the tailgate wire harness connector (White) and pull apart.

Tailgate wire harness connector (White)

Frame wire harness connector

(Gray)

Attach the connector cover

(white) to the frame wire harness connector (Gray).

Connector cover (White)

Frame wire harness connector

(Gray)

Pull out the plastic wire protector located in the vehicle bed by pressing the tabs and pulling the protector.

Be careful not to pull out all of the tailgate wire harness. Failure to do so may result in damage to vehicle components.

Plastic wire protector

Open the tailgate.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Pull out the wire harness from the vehicle bed.

■ Removing the tailgate

Attach the connector cover

(Gray) to the tailgate wire harness connector (White).

Tailgate wire harness connector (White)

Connector cover (Gray)

Open the tailgate to the angle where you can release the brackets on the support cables from the lugs on both sides.

Lift the support cable bracket up and slide it off.

Support cable bracket

Tilt the tailgate to about 30° from vertical and pull up the right side of the tailgate to unhook the right side.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Slide the tailgate a little to the right to unhook the left side.

To attach the tailgate, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.

Rear step bumper

For rear end protection and easier step-up loading.

To get on the rear step bumper, use the shaded area in the illustration.

CAUTION

■ Before removing the tailgate (vehicles with rear view monitor system)

Disconnect the wire harness between the back-up camera and the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury or damage to the vehicle components.

■ Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not drive with the tailgate open.

● Do not get on the rear step bumper.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the tailgate wire harness (vehicles with rear view monitor system)

Do not pull out all of the tailgate wire harness before open the tailgate.

■ To prevent damage to the camera lens (vehicles with rear view monitor system)

Store the removed tailgate with the back-up camera lens facing upward.

■ After closing the tailgate

Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.

■ To prevent damage to the rear step bumper

Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

Front se a t s

Bench type seat

Seat position adjustment lever

Separated type seats

Seat position adjustment lever

Driver’s seat lumbar support adjustment knob

(if equipped)

Seatback angle adjustment lever

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Moving passenger’s seat for rear seat entry (if equipped)

Lift the seatback angle adjusting lever or press the pedal behind the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

Move the seat to the front-most position.

■ After passengers are in the vehicle

Lift the seatback and return the seat until it locks.

Folding seatback (Bench type seat)

Pull the seatback lock release lever and fold down the seatback.

Hold the lever until you have swung the seatback forward slightly.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Folding passenger’s seat (vehicles with seatback table)

Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever and raise the seatback to its upright position.

Pull the seatback folding lever and fold the seatback down.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Active head restraints (Access Cab and Double Cab models only)

When the occupant’s back presses against the seatback during a rear-end collision, the head restraint moves slightly forward to help reduce the risk of whiplash on the seat occupant.

■ Active head restraints

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may show the head restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.

During rear-end collision

Inner structure

■ Waterproof and water-repellent seats (if equipped)

Waterproof and water-repellent seats are installed in your vehicle; however, the water-repellent effect does not last forever.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ Seat adjustment

● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

■ After returning the seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

■ Caution while driving

● Vehicles with seatback table: Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback.

● Access Cab models only: Do not rest your foot on the press pedal behind the passenger seat.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

Re a r se at s (Ac c e ss Ca b a nd Double Ca b m ode ls)

Access Cab models

The bottom cushion of the rear seats can be raised and lowered.

■ Before raising the bottom cushion

Stow the seat belt buckles.

This prevents the seat belt buckles from falling out when you fold the seatback.

■ Raising the bottom cushion

Raise the bottom cushion up while pulling the lever until it locks.

■ Lowering the bottom cushion

Push the bottom cushion down while pulling the lever until the bottom cushion locks into the seat position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Double Cab models

The seatback of the rear seat can be folded.

■ Before folding rear seats

Stow the rear seat belt buckles.

This prevents the seat belt buckles from falling out when you fold the seatback.

■ Folding rear seats

Pass the seat belts through the seat belt hangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belts are removed from the hangers before using them.

Remove the head restraint

Swing the bottom cushion up by pulling the lock release strap

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Attach the head restraints to the holders located on the back sides of the bottom cushions.

Fold down the seatback by pulling the lock release strap.

■ Waterproof and water-repellent seats (if equipped)

Waterproof and water-repellent seats are installed in your vehicle; however, the water-repellent effect does not last forever.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ When the seatback is folded/the bottom cushion is raised

Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback or auxiliary box while driving.

■ When returning the seats to their original position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

● Make sure the seatbacks and bottom cushions are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.

● Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

NOTICE

■ Before folding the seats

The seat belts buckles must be stowed.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

H e a d re st ra int s

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

■ Adjusting the head restraints

Bench type front seat

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Separated type front seat

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Rear seat (Double Cab models only)

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ When using the rear head restraints

Access Cab models

To use

Lift up the head restraint until it locks.

To fold

Pull the head restraint lock release lever to fold the head restraint.

Double Cab models

To use

Lift up the head restraint until it locks.

To fold

Pull the head restraint lock release lever to fold the head restraint.

■ Removing the front head restraints

Bench type seat

Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Separated type seat

Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

■ Removing the rear head restraints (Double Cab models only)

Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.

■ Installing the front head restraints

Bench type seat

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Separated type seat

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Installing the rear head restraints (Double Cab models only)

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

■ When installed the rear outboard head restraints to opposite direction

(Double Cab models only)

Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot.

The slot is located on the left side of the right head restraint anchor.

While pressing in the screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the front center seat (Bench type seat) and rear center seat head restraints (Double Cab models)

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

Se a t be lt s

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

■ Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

● Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

● Do not twist the seat belt.

■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

Release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

Move the height adjuster up as needed until you hear a click.

Down

Push the lock release button and slide the height adjuster down.

■ Center seat belt of the bench seat

Make sure the shoulder belt pass through the guide when using the center seat belt.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.

To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (

→

P. 112)

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

→

P. 63)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (

→

P. 108)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 63 regarding seat belt usage.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.

■ Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

● Always wear a seat belt properly.

● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.

● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to chocking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (

→

P. 64)

■ Seat belt pretensioners

● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ Seat belt damage and wear

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.

Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Using a seat belt extender

● Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

St e e ring w he e l

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injury.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

Ant i-gla re inside re a r vie w m ir ror

Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by using the following functions.

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Normal position

Anti-glare position

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (type A)

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns automatic mode on/off

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.

The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned on.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (type B)

In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns automatic mode on/off

The indicator comes on when automatic mode is turned on.

The mirror will revert to the automatic mode each time the engine switch is turned on.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Inside rear view mirror display (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

The inside rear view mirror displays the following information.

Also, the display and display settings can be changed.

■ Compass

→

P. 409

■ Outside temperature display

→

P. 376

■ Rear view monitor system

→

P. 178

■ Garage door opener

→

P. 400

■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

■ Customization that can be configured for the inside rear view mirror display (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

Settings (e.g. language) can be changed.

(Customizable features

→

P. 583)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

1 -3 . Adjust a ble c om pone nt s (se a t s, m irrors, st e e ring w he e l)

Out side re a r vie w m ir rors

Mirror angle can be adjusted.

Power-adjustable type

Select a mirror to adjust.

(L: left or R: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out using the switch.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Manually adjustable type

Adjust the mirror up, down, in or out by pushing the mirror surface.

Folding back the mirrors

Push backward to fold the mirrors.

■ Mirror operating conditions (vehicles with power-adjustable type only)

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

NOTICE

■ If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.

1 -4 . Ope ning a nd c losing t he w indow s

Pow e r w indow s

∗

The power windows can be opened/closed using the following switches.

Driver’s power window switches

Closing

Opening

One-touch opening (driver’s window only)

*: Pressing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

Front and rear passenger’s power window switch

Closing

Opening

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

∗

: If equipped

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

■ The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 43 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

CAUTION

■ Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

1 -4 . Ope ning a nd c losing t he w indow s

Ba c k w indow (ve hicle s w it h sliding t ype )

The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release lever.

Open/close

Push the lock release lever and slide the back window.

■ Closing the back window

Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.

CAUTION

■ While driving

Keep the back window closed.

This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

1 -5 . Re fue ling

Ope ning t he fue l t a nk c a p

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

■ Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

■ Opening the fuel tank cap

Open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank cap, turn it until a clicking sound is heard.

After releasing your hand, the cap will turn slightly to the opposite direction.

■ Fuel types

Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane Rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)

■ Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 21.1 gal. (80.0 L, 17.6 Imp.gal.)

CAUTION

■ Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION

■ Refueling the vehicle

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible engine hazard.

■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.

■ To prevent damage to the fuel filler door

Do not apply excessive force.

1 -6 . T he ft de t e rre nt syst e m

Engine im m obilize r syst e m

∗

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

● If the key is in contact with a metallic object

● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

∗

: If equipped

1-6. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-6. Theft deterrent system

For vehicles sold in New Caledonia

“Hereby, Tokai Rika Co., Ltd., declares that this Immobilizer, model RI-21BTY, is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.”

NOTICE

■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

1 -7 . Sa fe t y inform a t ion

Cor re c t driving post ure

Drive in a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (

→

P. 49)

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (

→

P. 49)

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.

(

→

P. 69)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

→

P. 58)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(

→

P. 63)

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ While driving

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

■ Adjusting the seat position

● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

1 -7 . Sa fe t y inform a t ion

SRS a irba gs

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and right front passenger from impact with interior components.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

Curtain shield airbags

Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.

1-7. Safety information

Airbag system components

Vehicles with bench type front seat

Vehicles with separated type front seat

1-7. Safety information

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG

OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light and

RSCA OFF indicator light

Driver airbag

RSCA OFF switch

(4WD models only)

Curtain shield airbag sensors (Access Cab and Double Cab models)

Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

Driver’s seat position sensor

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

Airbag sensor assembly

Front airbag sensors

Front passenger’s seat position sensor

Belt tension sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and right front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.

Bench type front seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the driver and right front passenger, and they are not designed to protect an occupant in the front center seating position.

1-7. Safety information

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies (Access Cab and Double cab models), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights, front passenger’s seat position sensor (Bench type seat), front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner assemblies, belt tension sensor (Bench type seat), RSCA OFF indicator light, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (

→

P. 506)

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The front windshield may crack.

■ Operating conditions (front airbags)

● The SRS front airbag will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12-18 mph [20-30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.

a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

1-7. Safety information

● It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (

→

P. 103)

■ Operating conditions (side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3307 lb.

[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12-18 mph [20-30 km/h]).

■ Operating conditions (side airbags)

The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will activate even if there is no passenger sitting in the right front passenger seat. (

→

P. 103)

■ Operating conditions (curtain shield airbags)

The SRS curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side or vehicle rollover.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

● Landing hard or vehicle falling

1-7. Safety information

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situation shown in the illustration.

● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

● Collision from the side

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

1-7. Safety information

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a lowspeed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

● Collision from the front

● Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

1-7. Safety information

■ When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard near the front passenger airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you now sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.

(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals and steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver’s seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver’s seat belt, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver’s airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children. (

→

P. 108)

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger has items resting on their knees.

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ SRS airbag precautions

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard or steering wheel pad.

These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy.

● Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the

SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

● Bench type front seat: Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components (

→

P. 90).

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

100

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment.

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system.

● Do not use tires or wheels other than the manufacturer’s recommended size. (

→

P. 564)

● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players.

● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

101

1-7. Safety information

Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover (4WD models only)

On/off (hold for a few seconds)

The RSCA OFF indicator turns on

(only when the engine switch is in the ON position.)

The roll sensing function for the curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners will turn back on automatically each time the engine switch is turned on.

■ The switch only should be used

In a situation where inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off-road driving).

■ Operating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on

● The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a vehicle rollover.

● The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.

CAUTION

■ For normal driving

Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

102

1 -7 . Sa fe t y inform a t ion

Front pa sse nge r oc c upa nt cla ssific at ion syst e m

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the right front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

AIR BAG OFF indicator light

AIR BAG ON indicator light

103

1-7. Safety information

Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system

■ Adult*

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Devices

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

■ Child*

or child restraint system*

AIR BAG ON

Off

Flashing*

Activated

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

AIR BAG

OFF*

Off

Flashing*

Deactivated

Activated

104

1-7. Safety information

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Not illuminated

Off

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Deactivated

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Activated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated

■ There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

AIR BAG

OFF

Off

Deactivated

Devices

Side airbag on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

105

1-7. Safety information

: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.

(

→

P. 108)

: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual for installing the child restraint system properly. (

→

P. 112)

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Wear the seat belt properly.

● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

● Do not place a heavy load on the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.

seatback table).

● Do not apply pressure to the front passenger seat by resting hands or legs on the seatback.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

106

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat or a back wall. This may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat or back wall, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat or back wall. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

→

P. 112)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.

● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

● Access Cab and Double Cab models: Do not attach a commercial seatback table or other heavy item to the back of the front passenger seat.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

107

1 -7 . Sa fe t y inform a t ion

Child re st ra int syst e m s

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(

→

P. 112)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat (Access Cab and Double Cab models only)

108

Forward facing — Convertible seat

1-7. Safety information

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (

→

P. 63)

109

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

● Regular Cab models: Toyota strongly urges use of a proper child restraint system which conforms to the size of the child.

● Access Cab and Double Cab models: Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● Access Cab and Double Cab models: A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

● Bench type front seat: Do not install a child restraint system on the center seat if it interferes with driving operations such as gear shifting. In this case, install the child restraint system on the right passenger seat.

● Bench type front seat: The driver and passengers sit on a bench seat in this vehicle. Therefore, when installing a child restraint system, the seat must be moved back from the SRS airbag as far as possible while also maintaining the driver’s seating position. Otherwise, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag could cause death or serious injury to the child.

110

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ Child restraint precautions

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the force of the rapid inflation could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■ When the child restraint system is not in use

● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

111

1 -7 . Sa fe t y inform a t ion

I nst a lling c hild re st ra int s

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

■ Using the LATCH anchors

Access Cab models

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the each rear seat.

Double Cab models

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outside rear seats.

Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.

112

1-7. Safety information

■ Using the seat belts

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (

→

P. 63)

■ Using the top tether strap

Regular Cab models with bench type seat

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor bracket is provided for each passenger seat.

113

1-7. Safety information

Regular Cab models with separated type seat

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor bracket is provided for passenger seat.

Access Cab models

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

114

Double Cab models

1-7. Safety information

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.

115

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system (Access Cab models)

Type A

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

116

Type B

1-7. Safety information

Canada only

Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

117

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system (Double Cab models)

Type A

Canada only

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the

LATCH anchors and tighten the lower straps.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

118

1-7. Safety information

Type B

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

A symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing (Regular Cab models) — Infant seat/convertible seat

Never install a rear-facing child restraint. Your vehicle is not designed to carry an infant.

■ Rear-facing (Access Cab and Double Cab models)

⎯

Infant seat/convertible seat

Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

119

1-7. Safety information

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

■ Forward-facing

⎯

Convertible seat

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

120

1-7. Safety information

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the

ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

While pushing the child seat into the seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

(

→

P. 123, 126, 127)

121

1-7. Safety information

■ Booster seat

Place the booster seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the booster seat.

Fit the seat belt to the booster seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(

→

P. 63)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

122

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Regular Cab models)

■ Bench type seat

Remove the head restraint.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat

Right side passenger seat

Swing the seatback forward slightly (

→

P. 50) and remove the anchor bracket covers.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat

Store the removed cover in a safe place such as the glove box.

Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.

123

1-7. Safety information

Center passenger seat

Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors, and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Replace the head restraint.

Installing position:

Right side passenger seat

Center passenger seat

124

■ Separated type seat

1-7. Safety information

Remove the head restraint.

Swing the seatback forward slightly (

→

P. 50) and remove the anchor bracket cover.

Store the removed cover in a safe place such as the glove box.

Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchor, and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

125

1-7. Safety information

Replace the head restraint.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Access Cab models)

Remove the anchor bracket covers.

Store the removed covers in a safe place such as the glove box.

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors.

Route the top tether strap through the routing device as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the top tether strap is not twisted.

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

126

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (Double Cab models)

Remove the head restraint.

Installing position:

Outside passenger seat

Center passenger seat

Outside passenger seat

Center passenger seat

Swing the seatback forward slightly. (

→

P. 55)

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.

Swing the seatback forward slightly. (

→

P. 55)

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket.

Return the seatback to its original position.

Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.

127

1-7. Safety information

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors, and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

Replace the head restraint.

Installing position:

Outside passenger seat

Center passenger seat

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

128

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ When installing a booster seat

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode. (

→

P. 65)

ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.

■ When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Access Cab and Double Cab models: If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Access Cab and Double Cab models:

Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

● Only put a forward-facing or booster child seat on the front seat when it is unavoidable. When installing a forwardfacing or booster child seat on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

129

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION

■ When installing a child restraint system

● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

● Push and pull the child restraint system from side to side and forward to be sure it is secure.

● After securing the child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

130

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

Driving t he ve hicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.

■ Starting the engine

→

P. 143

■ Driving

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.

(

→

P. 146)

Release the parking brake.

(

→

P. 154)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Manual transmission

With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to

(

→

P. 150)

Release the parking brake.

(

→

P. 154)

Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

■ Stopping

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N.

(

→

P. 146

)

Manual transmission

With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to N.

(

→

P. 150)

132

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Parking the vehicle

Automatic transmission

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake.

(

→

P. 154)

Shift the shift lever to P.

(

→

P. 146)

When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

Manual transmission

With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to N.

(

(

When parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R. If necessary, block the wheels.

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

Starting on a steep uphill

Automatic transmission

With the brake pedal depressed, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

133

2-1. Driving procedures

Manual transmission

With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.

Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal.

Release the parking brake.

■ Driving in the rain

● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■ Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:

● For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

→

P. 555)

134

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back window is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

135

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or

1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:

→

P. 544

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

→

P. 146

150)

● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.

● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

136

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by upshifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

■ When shifting the shift lever

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (automatic transmission only) or

N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

137

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When the vehicle is stopped

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

■ When the vehicle is parked

● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighter, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following.

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter, spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

138

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

● Toyota does not recommend occupying the rear cargo area when it is fitted with a slide-in camper, camper shell or other type cover while the engine is running. This caution applies to both driving and stopped or parked situations with the engine running. Particular care should be taken to prevent exhaust gases from entering camper bodies, trailers or other enclosures on or around your vehicle. If exhaust fumes are detected, open all windows and thoroughly ventilate the area.

■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■ When braking the vehicle

● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

139

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ When braking the vehicle

● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

NOTICE

■ When driving the vehicle

● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.

Vehicles with a manual transmission

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble.

● Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and moving forward.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

● Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.

Doing so may damage the clutch.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, always put the shift lever in P.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

140

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

● The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (

→

P. 515)

141

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

● Engine stalling

● Short in electrical components

● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.

● Brake function

● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (4WD vehicles), differentials, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

142

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

Engine (ignit ion) sw it c h

■ Engine switch

LOCK

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed.

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)

ACC

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

All electrical components can be used.

START

For starting the engine.

■ Starting the engine

Automatic transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.

Manual transmission

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in N.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and clutch pedal.

Turn the engine switch to the START position and start the engine.

143

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Turning the key from ACC to LOCK

Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission). (

→

P. 146

150)

Push in the key and turn to the

LOCK position.

■ Steering lock release

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly in either direction.

■ If the engine does not start (vehicles with engine immobilizer system)

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

→

P. 84)

■ Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION

■ When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

144

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the ACC position.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods if the engine is not running.

■ When starting the engine

● Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

● Do not race a cold engine.

● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

145

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

Aut om a t ic t ra nsm ission

∗

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

■ Shifting the shift lever

5-speed models

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

∗

: If equipped

146

2-1. Driving procedures

4-speed models

While the engine switch is on, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

■ Shift position uses

Shift position

Function

5-speed models 4-speed models

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

Position for engine braking

Position for more powerful engine braking

—

Position for engine braking

2 Position for more powerful engine braking

L Position for maximum engine braking

: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in

D for normal driving.

147

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Downshifting restrictions

The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded.

2WD models mph (km/h)

Downshifting

→

Maximum speed

5-speed models 4-speed models

81 (130)

56 (90)

22 (35)

—

71 (115)

34 (55)

4WD models

Downshifting

→

Transfer position

H2 and H4

L4 mph (km/h)

Maximum speed

5-speed models

4-speed models

81 (130)

31 (50)

—

56 (90)

22 (35)

9 (15)

71 (115)

22 (35)

34 (55)

6 (10)

148

2-1. Driving procedures

■ When driving with the cruise control system (if equipped)

The engine brake will not operate when downshifting from D to 4 (5-speed models) or 3 (4-speed models). (

→

P. 174)

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

→

P. 533

■ AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.

AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.

The engine speed may remain high after releasing the accelerator pedal.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

149

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

M a nua l t ra nsm ission

∗

■ Shifting the shift lever

6-speed models

Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly.

5-speed models

150

Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly.

∗

: If equipped

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Maximum allowable speed

Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maximum acceleration is necessary.

2WD models except PreRunner mph (km/h)

Shift position

Maximum speed

6-speed models 5-speed models

32 (52)

61 (99)

91 (146)

113 (182)

33 (53)

63 (101)

90 (146)

130 (209)

PreRunner

Shift position

5 mph (km/h)

Maximum speed

6-speed models 5-speed models

30 (49)

58 (93)

85 (137)

106 (171)

127 (204)

30 (48)

57 (92)

82 (133)

118 (190)

—

151

2-1. Driving procedures

4WD models mph (km/h)

Shift position Transfer position

H2 and H4

Maximum speed

6-speed models 5-speed models

30 (49) 30 (48)

11 (19)

58 (93)

22 (36)

85 (137)

11 (18)

57 (92)

22 (36)

82 (133)

33 (53)

106 (171)

41 (66)

127 (204)

49 (79)

32 (51)

118 (190)

46 (74)

—

■ Reverse warning buzzer (6-speed models only)

When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift lever is in R.

152

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

Tur n signa l leve r

Right turn

Left turn

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change.

The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

■ If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

153

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

Pa rk ing bra ke

Lever type

U.S.A. Canada

● Sets the parking brake

Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.

At this time, the indicator will come on.

● Release the parking brake

Press the button

Turn the lever clockwise

Press it in completely

Pedal type

U.S.A. Canada

Sets the parking brake*.

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

At this time, the indicator will come on.

*: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

154

2-1. Driving procedures

■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reach a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

■ Usage in winter time

See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (

→

P. 219)

NOTICE

■ Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

155

2 -1 . Driving proc e dure s

H or n

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

■ After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(

→

P. 69)

156

2 -2 . Ga uge s a nd m e t e rs

Ga uge s a nd m e t e rs

The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the engine switch is in the ON position.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

ODO/TRIP button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.

157

2-2. Gauges and meters

Odometer/trip meter

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Odometer and trip meter display button

Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter displays.

Odometer

Trip meter A

Trip meter B

:Pushing and holding the button will reset the trip meter.

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

158

2-2. Gauges and meters

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components

● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

→

P. 539)

159

2 -2 . Ga uge s a nd m e t e rs

I ndic a t ors a nd w a r ning light s

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

Center panel

160

2-2. Gauges and meters

■ Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

→

P. 153)

* 1,2

Slip indicator

(

→

P. 190, 192, 201)

Headlight high beam indicator (

→

P. 165)

* 1

VSC OFF indicator

(

→

P. 192, 202, 203)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator

(

→

P. 164)

Tail light indicator

(

→

P. 164)

(Canada)

(if equipped)

Security indicator

(

→

P. 84)

* 1

TRAC OFF indicator

(

→

P. 202, 203)

* 1

(if equipped)

* 1,5

Downhill assist control system indicator

(

→

P. 197)

RSCA OFF indicator

(

→

P. 102)

(5-speed automatic transmission vehicles)

Shift position and shift range indicators

(

→

P. 146)

(if equipped)

Active traction control system indicator

(

→

P. 190)

* 1

AUTO LSD indicator

(

→

P. 192)

(4WD models)

Four-wheel drive indicator (

→

P. 186)

(4-speed automatic transmission vehicles)

Shift position and shift range indicators

(

→

P. 146)

4LO indicator (

→

P. 186)

(4WD models)

* 1

Rear differential lock indicator (

→

P. 194)

(if equipped)

Cruise control indicator

(

→

P. 174)

161

2-2. Gauges and meters

* 1

AIR BAG ON indicator

(

→

P. 103)

* 1

AIR BAG OFF indicator

(

→

P. 103)

■ Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems. (

→

P. 505)

* 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1 * 1

(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)

* 1 * 1 * 1

(U.S.A.)

(if equipped)

* 1,3 * 4

* 1

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

* 2

: The indicator flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

* 3

: The indicator light comes on to indicate a malfunction.

* 4

: The indicator flashes to indicate a malfunction.

* 5

: For 2WD models, even though there is no function of deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover, the RSCA OFF indicator turns on briefly when the engine switch is turned to the ON position. But this is not a malfunction.

162

2-2. Gauges and meters

CAUTION

■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

163

2 -3 . Ope ra t ing t he light s a nd w ipe rs

H e a dlight sw it c h

The headlights can be operated manually.

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

Type A

U.S.A.

Canada

OFF

Vehicles with daytime running light system: The daytime running lights turn on.

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights (if equipped) and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.

164

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B

U.S.A.

Canada off

Vehicles with daytime running light system: The daytime running lights turn on.

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights (if equipped) and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above

(except daytime running lights) turn on.

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

165

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front turn signal lights turn on automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Automatic light off system

Opening the driver’s door with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position will turn the headlights and tail lights off.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the ON position, or turn the headlight switch off once and then back to the or position.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

166

2 -3 . Ope ra t ing t he light s a nd w ipe rs

Fog light sw it c h

∗

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog.

On/off

■ The fog lights can be turned on only when

The headlights are on low beam.

∗

: If equipped

167

2 -3 . Ope ra t ing t he light s a nd w ipe rs

Windshie ld w ipe rs a nd w a she r

■ Without intermittent type

Type A

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Washer operation

168

Type B

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Washer operation

169

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

or is selected).

Type A

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

170

Type B

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

Intermittent windshield wiper operation

Low speed windshield wiper operation

High speed windshield wiper operation

Temporary operation

171

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

STY23AF020

Washer/wiper dual operation

Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch must be in the ON position.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

172

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

NOTICE

■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

173

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Cruise c ont rol

∗

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicator

Cruise control switch

174

■ Setting the vehicle speed

Press the ON-OFF button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

∗

: If equipped

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied or the clutch pedal

(manual transmission only) is depressed.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

175

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Cruise control can be set when

● The shift lever is in the D or range 4. (vehicles with 5-speed automatic transmission)

● The shift lever is in the D or range 3. (vehicles with 4-speed automatic transmission)

● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

● Even without cancelling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

● VSC is activated.

■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Press the ON-OFF button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

176

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION

■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the ON-OFF button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● In heavy traffic

● On roads with sharp bends

● On winding roads

● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

177

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Rear view monitor system (vehicles w ith auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image is displayed on the inside rear view mirror.

The screen is turned off if any one of the following conditions are met:

• The shift lever is shifted out of R

• The screen remains on for 5 minutes

Automatic transmission

Manual transmission

Screen

178

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ The rear view monitor system can be operated when

The shift lever is in R and engine switch is ON.

■ Switching the screen on/off mode

The rear view monitor display on the inside rear view mirror can be turned on/off.

Type A: Press and hold

Type B: Press

to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A:

Press and select “Rear

View Monitor”, then press and hold .

Type B:

Press and select “Rear

View Monitor”, then press

Type A:

Press and hold display on/off.

to turn the

Type B:

Press on/off.

to turn the display

To leave the “Rear View Monitor Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

179

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Displayed area

The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.

Corners of bumper

■ Rear view monitor guide lines

● Guide lines are displayed on the monitor.

Vehicle width extension guide lines (blue)

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle width extension.

Distance guide line (blue)

This line indicates a position on the ground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on the ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.

Distance guide line (red)

This line indicates a position on the ground about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind on the ground of the rear bumper of your vehicle.

Vehicle center guide lines (blue)

These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

180

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Driving precautions

When the grade behind the vehicle slopes up sharply, objects appear to be farther away than they actually are.

When the grade behind the vehicle slopes down sharply, objects appear to be closer than they actually are.

181

2-4. Using other driving systems

Approx. 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)

The distance that appears on the screen between three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as the road) and the actual distance differ as follows.

In reality, C = A < B (C and A are equally far away; B is farther than C and A). However, on the screen, the situation appears to be A < B < C.

On the screen, it appears that a truck is parking about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) away. However, in reality if you back up to point A, you will hit the truck.

182

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Rear view monitor system camera

The rear view monitor system camera is located on the tailgate as shown in the illustration.

In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.

● The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.

● The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.

● Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains.

● Foreign matter, such as snow or mud, adheres to the camera lens.

● A bright object such as a white wall is reflected in the mirror surface over the monitor.

● The camera has scratches or dirt on it.

● The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

■ Smear effect

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* characteristic to the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect

A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

183

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Flicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

CAUTION

■ When using the rear view monitor system

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

● Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

● Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.

● Always check the vehicle surrounding area before proceeding, when backing up.

● Ancillary rear view monitor guide lines may not indicate precise position or distance, and do not change to show the direction of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned.

● Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.

● Do not use the system if the tailgate open.

● Never back up while looking only at the screen. The image on the screen is different from actual conditions. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces will differ from actual distance. If you back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle visually and with mirrors before proceeding.

■ Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

● If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

● The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold.

184

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE

■ Handling of the camera

● As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.

● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

● When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

● Do not scrub the camera lens roughly or clean it with a hard brush or abrasive cleaner. Doing so may damage the lens and adversely affect the image.

185

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Four-w he e l drive syst e m

∗

186

Use the front-wheel drive control switch to select the following transfer modes.

H2 (high speed position, two-wheel drive)

Use this for normal driving on dry hard-surfaced roads.

This position gives greater economy, quietest ride and least wear.

H4 (high speed position, four-wheel drive)

Use this for driving only on tracks that permit the tires slide, like off-road, icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than two-wheel drive.

The four-wheel drive indicator comes on.

L4 (low speed position, four-wheel drive)

Use this for maximum power and traction. Use L4 for climbing or descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or deep snow.

The four-wheel drive and

4LO indicators come on.

∗

: If equipped

2-4. Using other driving systems

Shifting between H4 and L4

■ Shifting from H4 to L4

Automatic transmission

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal help down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.

If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the above steps again.

Manual transmission

Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Depress and hold the clutch pedal.

Push and turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.

If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the above steps again.

■ Shifting from L4 to H4

Automatic transmission

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal help down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the front-wheel drive control switch counterclockwise.

If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the above steps again.

Manual transmission

Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Depress and hold the clutch pedal.

Turn the front-wheel drive control switch counterclockwise.

If the four-wheel drive indicator flashes and the buzzer sounds, try the above steps again.

187

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Shifting between H2 and H4

● Shifting from H2 to H4

Reduce the vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h) and turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully clockwise.

● Shifting from H4 to H2

Turn the front-wheel drive control switch fully counterclockwise.

This can be done at any speed. You need not depress the clutch pedal.

(manual transmission)

■ If the four-wheel drive indicator light or the 4LO indicator light blinks

● Shifting from H2 to H4

• If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating.

• If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink and the buzzer sounds, stop the vehicle or reduce the vehicle speed to less than 62 mph (100 km/h). Operate the switch again.

● Shifting from H4 to H2

If the four-wheel drive indicator continues to blink, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive forward or backward in a short distance.

● Shifting to H4 or L4

Automatic transmission

If the 4LO indicator continues to blink when you operate the front-wheel drive control switch to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, shift the shift lever securely to N and operate the switch again.

Manual transmission

If the 4LO indicator continues to blink when you operate the front-wheel drive control switch to the H4 or L4 position, drive forward or backward in a short distance, then stop the vehicle completely, depress the clutch pedal and operate the switch again.

If the indicator light continues to blink even if doing so, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. There may be a trouble in the four-wheel drive system.

188

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Shifting to L4

VSC is automatically turned off.

■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency

You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 10 miles (16 km) each month.

This will assure that the front-drive components are lubricated.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

● Never shift the front-wheel drive control switch from H2 to H4 if the wheels are slipping.

Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.

● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, use H2 position. Driving on dry and hard surface roads in H4 or L4 position may cause drive component oil leakage, seizure, or other problems resulting in an accident.

Further, it may cause tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

● Avoid turning suddenly in H4 or L4 position. If you do turn suddenly, the difference in turning speeds between the front and rear wheels may have a similar effect to braking, thus making driving difficult.

189

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Ac t ive t ra c t ion c ont rol syst e m

∗

The active traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

■ System operation

Vehicles with an automatic transmission:

Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and put the frontwheel drive control switch in the L4 position.

Vehicles with a manual transmission:

Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal and put the front-wheel drive control switch in the L4 position.

Press the A-TRAC switch to activate the system.

At this time, the active traction control system indicator will come on.

To cancel the system, push the switch again.

When the active traction control system is operating

If four wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the active traction control system has been engaged.

∗

: If equipped

190

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When the rear differential is locked (vehicles with the rear differential lock system)

The active traction control system is activated only when the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (6 km/h).

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the active traction control system

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in the system.

● Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. It may occur when the system is operating.

■ If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation, a buzzer will sound and A-TRAC indicator blink to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

CAUTION

■ The active traction control system may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the active traction control system is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

191

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

AU TO LSD syst e m

The AUTO LSD system aids traction by using the traction control system to control engine performance and braking when one of the rear wheels begins to spin.

The system should be used only when one of the rear wheels spinning occurs in a ditch or rough surface.

■ System operation

The system can be used on 2WD models and in 2WD mode on

4WD models.

Press the VSC OFF switch to turn on the system.

At this time, the AUTO LSD and VSC OFF indicators will come on simultaneously.

To turn off the system, push the switch again.

If the engine is turned off while the AUTO LSD indicator is on and then restarted, the indicator will turn off automatically.

When the AUTO LSD system is operating

If the rear wheels spin, the slip indicator flashes to indicate that the AUTO LSD system has been controlled the spinning of the rear wheels.

192

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ If the engine is turned off and restarted

The AUTO LSD system and the indicators are automatically turned off.

■ Reactivation of the VSC system linked to vehicle speed

When the AUTO LSD system is turned on, the VSC system will turn on automatically if vehicle speed increases.

■ If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

The system will be automatically restored after a short time.

CAUTION

■ To avoid an accident

● Do not use the AUTO LSD system in conditions other than the above.

A much greater steering effort and more careful cornering control will be required.

● Do not drive with the AUTO LSD system continuously turned on.

193

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Re a r diffe re nt ia l loc k syst e m

∗

The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface.

The rear differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear wheels is spinning.

Press the RR DIFF LOCK switch to lock the rear differential.

At this time, the indicator will blink. Wait a few seconds for the system to complete operation. After the rear differential is locked, the rear differential lock indicator will stop blinking and remain on.

To unlock the rear differential, push the switch again.

Using the rear differential lock system

Automatic transmission

4WD models: Before using the rear differential lock system.

Stop the vehicle, shift the shift lever to N and put the frontwheel drive control switch in the L4 position to see if this is sufficient. If this has no effect, additionally use the rear differential lock system.

Be sure to stop the wheels.

Press the RR DIFF LOCK switch.

After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.

194

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.

To unlock the rear differential, push the switch again.

∗

: If equipped

2-4. Using other driving systems

Manual transmission

4WD models: Before using the rear differential lock system.

Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 2 mph (3 km/h). Depress the clutch pedal and put the front-wheel drive control switch in the L4 position to see if this is sufficient. If this has no effect, additionally use the rear differential lock system.

Be sure to stop the wheels.

Depress the clutch pedal.

Press the RR DIFF LOCK switch.

After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.

Slowly release the clutch pedal.

Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.

To unlock the rear differential, push the switch again.

■ Locking the rear differential

● When the rear differential is locked, VSC is automatically turned off.

(The rear differential lock and VSC OFF indicators come on.)

● The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked.

It is normal operation for the ABS warning light and VSC OFF indicator to be on at this time. If the DAC switch turns on, the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes.

• ABS

• Brake assist system

• VSC

• TRAC

• Downhill assist control system

• Hill-start assist control system

■ The rear differential lock is disengaged when

Shift the front-wheel drive control switch to H2 or H4 position. (4WD models)

Never forget to turn off the switch after using this feature.

195

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ After unlocking the rear differential

To check that the indicator goes off, turn the engine switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine.

CAUTION

■ To avoid an accident

● Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or ragged surface. Large steering effort and careful cornering control will be required.

● Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.

Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the differential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to possible damage to differential lock component parts.

● Do not drive over 5 mph (8 km/h) when the differential is locked.

● Do not keep driving with the RR DIFF LOCK switch on.

196

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Dow nhill Assist Cont rol syst e m

∗

The downhill assist control system helps to prevent excessive speed on steep downhill descents.

■ System operation

The system will operate when the vehicle is traveling under 15 mph (25 km/h) and the front-wheel drive control switch is in the

L4 position.

Press the DAC switch. The indicator will come on, and the system will operate.

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) or less, release your foot from the accelerator or brake pedal to activate the system.

When the system is in operation, the slip indicator will flash, and the stop lights/high mounted stop light will come on. A sound may also occur during the operation. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■ Turning off the system

Press the DAC switch while the system is in operation. The indicator will flash as the system gradually ceases operation, and will turn off when the system is fully off.

Pressing the DAC switch while the indicator is flashing will start the system again.

∗

: If equipped

197

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Operating tips

The system will operate when the shift lever is in a position other than P.

However, to make effective use of the system it is recommended that the shift lever be shifted to 2 or L.

■ The system will not operate when

● The front-wheel drive control switch is in the H2 or H4 position.

● The rear differential is locked.

■ The downhill assist control system indicator light flashes when

● The shift lever is in the N position.

● The front-wheel drive control switch is in the H2 or H4 position.

● The rear differential is locked.

■ If the brake system overheats

The system will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

■ System malfunction

● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position.

● The downhill assist control system indicator does not come on when the

DAC switch is pressed.

In the above cases have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ Do not rely excessively on the downhill assist control system

It may not be able to maintain a low speed over road surfaces on which sliding can easily occur, such as extremely steep slopes or icy or muddy roads.

198

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Clut c h st a r t c a nc e l sw it c h

∗

The switch allows the vehicle to be driven out of difficult situations by cranking the engine with the clutch engaged.

Never use the switch for normal engine starting. Be sure to follow the starting procedure. (

→

P. 143)

Press the CLUTCH START

CANCEL switch to cancel the clutch start system when the engine switch is turned to the

ON position.

The indicator comes on when the clutch start system is canceled.

The clutch start cancel switch is automatically turned off when the engine switch is turned off.

■ Clutch start system

The system is designed to keep the starter motor from operating if the clutch pedal is not depressed all the way down.

∗

: If equipped

199

2 -4 . U sing ot he r driving syst e m s

Driving a ssist syst e m s

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.

■ Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, while the system detects a panic stop situation.

■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

■ Trailer Sway Control (vehicles with towing hitch and 7 pin connector)

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is detected.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if

VSC is turned off or experiences a malfunction.

■ TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintains drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

■ Hill-start assist control (if equipped)

Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope. It operates for approximately 5 seconds at maximum.

200

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping or rolling backward when starting on an incline, or if any of the drive wheels spins, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating.

The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system or

Trailer Sway Control is operating.

201

2-4. Using other driving systems

To disable VSC, Trailer Sway Control and TRAC (2WD models and 2WD mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC, Trailer Sway

Control and TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels.

You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■ Turning off TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Press and hold the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC, VSC and Trailer

Sway Control.

The VSC OFF and TRAC OFF indicators will come on.

Push the switch again to turn both systems back on.

202

2-4. Using other driving systems

To disable VSC, Trailer Sway Control and/or TRAC (4WD mode on 4WD models)

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, VSC, Trailer Sway

Control and TRAC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels.

You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

■ Turning off TRAC

Quickly push and release the

VSC OFF switch to turn off

TRAC.

The TRAC OFF indicator will come on.

Push the switch again to turn the system back on.

■ Turning off TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Press and hold the VSC OFF switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC, VSC and Trailer

Sway Control.

The VSC OFF and TRAC OFF indicators will come on.

Push the switch again to turn both systems back on.

203

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ When the TRAC OFF indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed

TRAC, hill-start assist control, downhill assist control system cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Reactivation of the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems after turning off the engine

Turning off the engine after turning off the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway

Control systems will automatically reactivate them.

■ Automatic TRAC reactivation (AUTO LSD mode)

With AUTO LSD mode, VSC OFF and AUTO LSD indicator lights turn on.

The TRAC system will turn on when the vehicle speed increases.

■ Automatic TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control reactivation

If the TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC, VSC, Trailer Sway

Control, brake assist and hill-start assist control system

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

■ Hill-start assist control is operational when (if equipped)

● The shift lever is in the D, 4, 3, 2 (5-speed automatic transmission), D, 3,

2 (4-speed automatic transmission) or L positions.

● The brake pedal is not depressed.

204

2-4. Using other driving systems

■ Hill-start assist control will not operate when (if equipped)

● The shift lever is in the P, R or N positions.

● The rear differential is locked.

■ If the brake system overheats

TRAC and hill-start control will cease operation and a buzzer will sound to alert the driver. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

CAUTION

■ The ABS does not operate effectively when

● The limits of the gripping performance have been exceeded.

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

● When driving with tire chains

● When driving over bumps in the road

● When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads

■ When VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated

The slip indicator flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator flashes.

■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if TRAC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■ If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively

Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.

205

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION

■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appropriate tire pressure level.

The ABS, VSC, TRAC and Trailer Sway Control will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■ Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

■ Trailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.

■ If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

● Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

● Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. (

→

P. 240)

206

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Off-roa d pre c a ut ions (4WD mode ls a nd Pre Runne r)

This vehicle has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle feature

● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, it has a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

● An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.

● It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

207

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

● In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

● Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

● Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity.

● Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control.

● When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

● Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

208

2-5. Driving information

Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

● Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.

● Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private property.

● Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.

● Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■ Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.

● State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

● State Motor Vehicle Bureau

● Recreational Vehicle Clubs

● U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

209

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

● Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.

● Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

● Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.

● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

210

2-5. Driving information

NOTICE

■ To prevent the water damage

● Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.

● Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

■ When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■ Inspection after off-road driving

● Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

211

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Ca rgo a nd lugga ge

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load.

● Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.

● Be sure all items are secured in place.

● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

■ Deck rails

Headboard rail

Side rails

To use the deck rails, you must install genuine Toyota accessories or their equivalent for the deck rails.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions when installing a genuine

Toyota accessory or equivalent.

CAUTION

■ When you secure cargo with the deck rails

Be sure to follow the instructions below in order to avoid the cargo coming loose.

● Do not install accessories (tie-down cleats, storage boxes, etc.) at more than the following number of locations per deck rail.

• Side rail:

Short deck—Max. 3 locations

Long deck—Max. 4 locations

• Headboard rail:

Max 3 locations

212

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ When you secure cargo with the deck rails

● Spread out tie-down/support locations evenly along the length of the rails.

● Do not exceed a total tensile load of 440 lb. (200 kg) per deck rail.

● To prevent luggage or cargo from sliding forward during braking, make sure the deck rail accessories such as storage box are securely attached on the deck rails.

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity)

−

(Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400

−

750 (5

150)

= 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

213

2-5. Driving information

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B lb. (kg)

−

A lb. (kg) = C lb. (kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg)

−

D lb. (kg) = E lb. (kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

214

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.

● Receptacles containing gasoline

● Aerosol cans

■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Do not stack anything behind the front seats higher than the seatbacks.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.

• Driver’s feet

• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• Instrument panel

• Dashboard

• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid

● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

215

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Capacity and distribution

● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

216

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Ve hicle loa d lim it s

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

■ Total load capacity: (

→

P. 549)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

■ Seating capacity:

Regular Cab models

With separated type seats—

2 occupants

With bench type seat—

3 occupants

Access Cab models

4 occupants (Front 2, Rear 2)

Double Cab models

5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): (

→

P. 228, 551)

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

■ Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (

→

P. 461)

217

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

218

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Wint e r driving t ips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

■ Pre-winter preparations

● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte.

● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

■ Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

● Do not try to forcibly open a window, scrape an outside rear view mirror surface or move a wiper or outside rear view mirror that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.

● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.

219

2-5. Driving information

■ When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

■ When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

0.2 in. (5 mm) in diameter

Cross chain

0.25 in. (6.3 mm) in diameter

Regulations on the use of snow chains

● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

● Install the chains on the rear tires.

● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

220

2-5. Driving information

■ Snow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

● Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.

CAUTION

■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h) regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

● Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

● 4WD models:

Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

■ Driving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

● Avoid sudden turns and braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

221

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ When parking the vehicle

Always use wheel blocks when parking without the parking brake. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

222

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Tra ile r t ow ing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as towing kits, etc.

223

2-5. Driving information

Towing related terms

■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight

(including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.

224

2-5. Driving information

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

Front GAWR

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

Rear GAWR

■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

(With brakes)

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, towing package

(if available), hitch and hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed

GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.

If the gross trailer weight exceeds

3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a trailer with 2 or more axles.

225

2-5. Driving information

■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

(Without brakes)

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. (

→

P. 232)

226

2-5. Driving information

Weight limits

● The gross trailer weight must never exceed the TWR described in the table. (

→

P. 228, 551)

● The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR described in the table. (

→

P. 228)

Regular Cab models and Double Cab models

● The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification

Label.

● The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the

GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

Access Cab models

● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.

● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (905 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.

● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2265 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

227

2-5. Driving information

GCWR, TWR, Unbraked TWR, Fifth wheel and Gooseneck towing TWR

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.

■ GCWR * and TWR *

Regular Cab models

Model code

Engine

Driving system

GCWR TWR

TRN220L-

TRMDKA

TRN220L-

TRPDKA

TRN240L-

TRMDKA

TRN240L-

TRPDKA

2.7 L

4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

2WD

4WD

7150 lb.

(3240 kg)

7170 lb.

(3250 kg)

7530 lb.

(3415 kg)

7580 lb.

(3435 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

228

: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

2-5. Driving information

Access Cab models

Model code

TRN225L-

CRMDKA

TRN225L-

CRPDKA

TRN245L-

CRMDKA

TRN245L-

CRPDKA

TRN265L-

CRPDKA

GRN225L-

CRFDKA

GRN245L-

CRADKA

GRN245L-

CRFDKA

GRN265L-

CRADKA

Engine

2.7 L

4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

Driving system

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

2WD

GCWR

7440 lb.

(3370 kg)

7470 lb.

(3385 kg)

7850 lb.

(3560 kg)

7870 lb.

(3565 kg)

7630 lb.

(3460 kg)

7460 lb.

(3380 kg)

7960 lb.

(3610 kg)

11090 lb.

(5030 kg)

7920 lb.

(3590 kg)

11060 lb.

(5015 kg)

7720 lb.

(3500 kg)

10850 lb.

(4920 kg)

TWR

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

3300 lb.

(1495 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

229

2-5. Driving information

Double Cab models

Model code

TRN225L-

PRPDKA

TRN265L-

PRPDKA

GRN245L-

PRADKA

GRN245L-

PRFDKA

GRN250L-

PRADKA

Engine

2.7 L

4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

Driving system

2WD

4WD

GCWR

7450 lb.

(3375 kg)

7710 lb.

(3495 kg)

8040 lb.

(3645 kg)

11170 lb.

(5065 kg)

8010 lb.

(3630 kg)

11150 lb.

(5055 kg)

8100 lb.

(3670 kg)

11140 lb.

(5050 kg)

TWR

3400 lb.

(1540 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6400 lb.

(2900 kg)

230

2-5. Driving information

Model code

Engine

Driving system

GCWR TWR

GRN265L-

PRADKA

GRN270L-

PRADKA

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

2WD

7800 lb.

(3535 kg)

10940 lb.

(4960 kg)

7890 lb.

(3575 kg)

11020 lb.

(4995 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

3500 lb.

(1585 kg)

6500 lb.

(2945 kg)

: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (

→

P. 227

553)

: Without towing package

: With towing package

■ Unbraked TWR

1000 lb. (450 kg)

■ Fifth wheel and gooseneck towing TWR

Toyota does not recommend fifth wheel and gooseneck towing.

: These models meet the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE

International per SAE J2807.

231

2-5. Driving information

Trailer Tongue Weight

● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.

● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

• Tongue Weight

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100

= 9% to 11%)

Gross trailer weight

Tongue weight

232

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.

If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front fender height above the front axle before connection.

Adjust weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same height as before connection.

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

2-5. Driving information

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.

● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.

● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.

● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer.

After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

Bumper towing (vehicles with steel bumper only)

The rear bumper of your vehicle is equipped with a hole to install a trailer ball. If you have any questions, contact your Toyota dealer.

The gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus cargo weight) when towing with the bumper must never exceed the TWR (

→

P. 228,

551) or 3500 lb. (1585 kg) whichever is lower.

233

2-5. Driving information

Selecting trailer ball

Use the correct trailer ball for your application.

Trailer ball load rating

Matches or exceeds the gross trailer weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer coupler. Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.

Trailer class

Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I 1 7/8 in.

Shank length

Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2 threads.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

234

2-5. Driving information

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball

Weight carrying ball position:

56.1 in. (1425 mm)

Hitch receiver pin hole position: 44.2 in. (1123 mm)

Connecting trailer lights

Vehicles with 7 pin connector

Use the wire harness stored in the rear end under the vehicle body.

Vehicles without 7 pin connector

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take care to comply with your state’s laws when installing trailer lights.

235

2-5. Driving information

■ Service connector for towing brake controller (vehicles with 7 pin connector)

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller as shown.

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:

● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.

● Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph

(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.

● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicletrailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.

236

2-5. Driving information

● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.

Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-tovehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.

● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn.

● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.

● Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not use fifth gear (5-speed manual transmission), sixth gear (6-speed manual transmission), or do not put the transmission in D (automatic transmission).

237

2-5. Driving information

● Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(

→

P. 539)

● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P (automatic transmission) or in 1 or R

(manual transmission). Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s wheels.

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

Shift into P (automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) and turn off the engine.

● When restarting after parking on a slope:

With the transmission in P (automatic transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed, start the engine. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.

Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.

238

2-5. Driving information

Release the parking brake (and also the brake pedal on vehicles with an automatic transmission), and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

Coupler

Trailer ball

■ Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (

→

P. 564)

● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.

● All trailer lights work as required by law.

● All lights work each time you connect them.

● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

● The vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched.

Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.

239

2-5. Driving information

● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

■ Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components

(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.

■ Maintenance

● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Scheduled Maintenance Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

■ If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

● If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize. (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to stabilize the vehicle and trailer.)

240

2-5. Driving information

● After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.

Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

CAUTION

■ Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

● If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (905 kg), a sway control device with sufficient capacity is required.

● If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2265 kg), a weight distributing hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.

241

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ To avoid accident or injury

● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.

● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

● Do not use cruise control when towing.

● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

■ Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

242

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION

■ When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking effectiveness.

● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE

■ When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

243

2 -5 . Driving inform a t ion

Dinghy t ow ing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

244

2-5. Driving information

245

3 -1 . U sing t he a ir c ondit ioning syst e m a nd de fogge r

Air c ondit ioning syst e m

Fan speed control dial

Temperature control dial

Air outlet selection dial

Air conditioning

ON/OFF switch

Outside air or recirculated air mode switch

Adjusting the settings

■ Adjusting the temperature setting

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

For quick cooling, turn the temperature control dial to the MAX A/C position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector will be set to recirculated air mode.

■ Adjusting the fan speed

Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

Set the dial to OFF to turn the fan off.

248

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Selecting the air outlets

Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be selected for more detailed adjustment.

When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body.

When the dial is set to , air flows to the upper body and feet.

Double Cab models only

When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet.

Double Cab models only

249

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

When the dial is set to , air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

The air intake selector is automatically set to outside air mode.

To return the recirculated air mode, press .

Double Cab models only

When the dial is set to , air flows to the windshield and side windows.

The air intake selector is automatically set to outside air mode.

In this position, the air intake selector cannot be changed to the recirculated air mode.

■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between (outside air mode) and

(recirculated air mode) each time the switch is pressed.

250

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ If the ambient temperature drops while using the recirculated air mode

The air intake mode automatically changes from recirculated air mode to outside air mode after a few minutes.

To cancel this function:

Press and hold for longer than 2 seconds.

To reactivate this function:

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK or ACC position.

Adjusting the position of the air outlets

Center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

251

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Right and left side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

252

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Right and left side outlets

Open the vent.

Close the vent.

■ For quick clearing of the windshield and side windows

Press to turn the air conditioning on.

■ Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

■ When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.

■ Air conditioning filter

→

P. 469

■ When is selected for the air outlets used

For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flowing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature adjustment dial.

■ Air conditioning odors

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

253

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

CAUTION

■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

254

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Audio syst e m t ype s

With Display Audio system

Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.

Without Display Audio system

Type A: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

255

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B: CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio

256

Title

Using the radio

Using the CD player

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

Operating an iPod

Operating a USB memory

Optimal use of the audio system

Using the AUX port

Using the steering wheel audio switches

Page

3-2. Using the audio system

Language settings

Vehicles with Display Audio system

Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.

Vehicles without Display Audio system (type B only)

The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and messages may be changed.

Press .

Press or as corresponds to the desired language.

For vehicles sold except Canada

“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)

For vehicles sold in Canada

“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

■ Certifications for the Bluetooth

(vehicles with Display Audio system)

257

3-2. Using the audio system

■ About Bluetooth

(vehicles with Display Audio system)

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Corporation.

Other trademarks and trade names are owned by various different owners.

CAUTION

■ For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada

Vehicles without Display Audio system

● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

258

3-2. Using the audio system

CAUTION

Vehicles with Display Audio system

Properly shielded a grounded cables and connectors must be used for connection to host computer and/or peripherals in order to meet FCC emission limits.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

259

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

U sing t he ra dio

Type A

Power Volume

Station selector

Adjusting the frequency (AM, FM mode) or channel

(SAT mode)

Seeking the frequency

Scanning for receivable stations

Type B

Power Volume

⋅

SAT/FM mode buttons

Displaying radio text messages

Changing the channel

Station selector

Adjusting the frequency

(AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)

Seeking the frequency

260

Scanning for receivable stations

Selecting the preset station pages

AM/FM/SAT mode button

Changing the channel

Displaying radio text messages

Silencing a sound

3-2. Using the audio system

Setting station presets (excluding XM

Satellite Radio)

Search for desired stations by turning or or pressing “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

Press and hold a button (from to ) until you hear a beep.

Type B only:

Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a total of 6 pages.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM

Satellite Radio)

■ Scanning the preset radio stations

Press and hold or until you hear a beep.

Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press or again.

■ Scanning all radio stations within range

Press .

All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press or again.

261

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Displaying radio text messages (FM mode only)

When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on the display. To display the message, press or .

If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press and hold or until you hear a beep.

Text messages are not displayed while driving.

Satellite Radio (type B only)

■ Receiving XM

Satellite Radio

Press .

The display changes as follows each time is pressed.

→

SAT

Turn to select the desired channel in all the categories or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on the current category.

to select the desired channel in

■ Setting XM

Satellite Radio channel presets

Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button (from to

) until you hear a beep.

Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There are a total of 6 pages.

■ Changing the channel category

Press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

262

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Scanning XM

Satellite Radio channels

● Scanning channels in the current category

Press .

When the desired channel is reached, press again.

● Scanning the preset channels

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

When the desired channel is reached, press again.

■ Displaying text information

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Title (song/program title)

→

Title (song/program title)

Name (artist name/ feature).

263

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Reception sensitivity

● Type B only: Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM

Satellite Radio.

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted on the right-side front fender. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it. (

→

P. 306)

■ XM

Satellite Radio (type B only)

An XM

Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.

● XM

subscriptions

For detailed information about XM

U.S.A.

⎯

Satellite Radio or to subscribe:

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.

Canada

⎯

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-209-0079.

● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

service or reporting a problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver’s 8-character ID number will appear.

● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM

Satellite Radio.

264

3-2. Using the audio system

■ If XM

Satellite Radio does not operate normally (type B only)

If a problem occurs with the XM

tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

CHECK

ANTENNA

UPDATING

(CH UNAUTHO-

RIZED)

NO SIGNAL

CHANNEL OFF

AIR

-----

The XM

antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM

antenna cable is attached securely.

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to XM

Satellite Radio.

The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM

Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM

Satellite Radio.

The XM

signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at this time. No action needed.

265

3-2. Using the audio system

---

The channel you selected is no longer available.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM

Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-

209-0079 (Canada)

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

266

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

U sing t he CD pla ye r

Type A

Power Volume

Selector buttons

CD eject

Selecting a track

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a track

Type B

Power Volume

Searching playback

Playback

Displaying text messages

Selector buttons

CD eject

Selecting a track

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a track

Searching playback

Playback

Playback/ pause

Displaying text messages

267

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading CD

Insert a CD.

Ejecting CD

Press and remove the CD.

Selecting a track

Turn or or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired track.

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Press and hold “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

Scanning tracks

Press .

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

To cancel, press or again.

Press or again when the desired track is reached.

Playing and pausing tracks (type B only)

Press .

268

3-2. Using the audio system

Random playback

Type A:

Songs are played in random order.

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B:

Songs are played in random order.

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

Type A:

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B:

To cancel, press the button again.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time order:

or is pressed, the display changes in the following

Track title

→

Track name/Artist name

→

Track name/Elapsed time.

269

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Error messages

“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or .

Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on the recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protection features may not be used.

■ CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

270

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual

Discs.

Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

● CD player with changer and AM/FM radio: CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

● CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area

● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-

R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

271

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ CD player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

● Do not apply oil to the CD player.

● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

● Do not insert more than one CD at a time.

272

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Pla ying M P3 a nd WM A disc s

Type A

Power Volume

Selector buttons

CD eject

Selecting a file

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a file

Type B

Power Volume

Searching playback

Playback

Selecting a folder

Displaying text messages

Selector buttons

CD eject

Selecting a file

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a file

Searching playback

Playback

Playback/ pause

Selecting a folder

Displaying text messages

273

3-2. Using the audio system

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

→

P. 268

Selecting and scanning a folder

■ Selecting folders one at a time

Press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired folder.

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders

Press and hold or until you hear a beep.

The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.

again.

When the desired folder is reached, press or

■ Returning to the first folder

Press and hold “

∨

” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting and scanning files

■ Selecting one file at a time

Turn or or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired file.

■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Press .

When the desired file is reached, press or once again.

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold “ ∧ ” or “

∨

” on .

274

Playing and pausing files (type B only)

Press .

Random playback

Type A:

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B:

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

■ Repeating a file

Type A:

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B:

To cancel, press the button again.

■ Repeating all of the files in a folder

Type A:

Press (RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Type B:

Press (RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

3-2. Using the audio system

275

3-2. Using the audio system

Switching the display

Press .

Each time or order:

is pressed, the display changes in the following

Track title

→

Track title/Artist name

→

Track title/Album name

→

Track title/Elapsed time.

■ Error messages

“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press or . Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played.

■ Discs that can be used

→

P. 270

■ CD player protection feature

→

P. 270

■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

→

P. 270

■ Lens cleaners

→

P. 270

276

3-2. Using the audio system

■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft

audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

● Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

277

3-2. Using the audio system

● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.

278

3-2. Using the audio system

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used (

→

P. 271)

■ CD player precautions (

→

P. 272)

279

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Ope ra t ing a n iPod

∗

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

Press .

∗

: If equipped

280

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel

Power Volume

Selector buttons

Selector knob

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a song

Playback

Playback/ pause

Displaying text messages

281

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a play mode

Press (BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.

Press , , or as that corresponds to the desired play mode.

Press (MORE) to change to the second selection list.

■ Play mode list

Play mode

PLIST

ARTIST

ALBUM

First selection

Playlist select

Artist select

Albums select

Second selection

Songs select

Albums select

Songs select

Third selection

Songs select

Fourth selection

GENRE Genre select Artists select

Albums select

Songs select

SONGS

PODCST

COMPSR

BOOK

Songs select

Albums select

Composers select

Songs select

Albums select

Songs select

Depending on the model, the name of your iPod may be displayed at the top of the list.

282

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Selecting a list

Turn to display the first selection list.

Press to select the desired item.

Pressing that corresponds to “MORE” changes to the second selection list.

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.

To return to the previous selection list, press ( ).

Selecting songs from a song list

The current playlist is displayed.

Turning to select the desired song.

Press screen.

Selecting songs

returns the screen from list display to the previous

Turn or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired song.

283

3-2. Using the audio system

Playing and pausing songs

Press .

Fast-forwarding and reversing songs

Press and hold “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

Shuffle playback

■ Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order

To cancel, press the button again.

Repeat play

To cancel, press the button again.

Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the last song has ended.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title

→

Track title/Artist name

→

Track title/Album name

→

Track title/Elapsed time

284

3-2. Using the audio system

■ About iPod

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

● iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

■ iPod functions

● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point at which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.

■ iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Manual.

■ Error messages

“IPOD ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the iPod, inside the USB box or the connection between them.

“NO SONGS”:This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“UPDATE YOUR IPOD”:This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.

285

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models iPod

Model iPod nano

Generation

5th generation

1st generation

2nd generation

3rd generation

1st generation

Software version

Ver. 1.2.0 or higher

Ver. 1.3.0 or higher

Ver. 1.1.2 or higher

Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

Ver. 1.1.0 or higher

Ver. 1.0.0 or higher iPod touch iPod classic

Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some models listed above might be incompatible with this system.

iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.

iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999

● Maximum number of songs in device: 65,025

● Maximum number of songs per list: 65,025

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

286

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to iPod

● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

287

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Ope ra t ing a U SB m e m or y

∗

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.

Press .

∗

: If equipped

288

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Control panel

Power Volume

Selector buttons

Selecting a file

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a file

Searching playback

Playback

Playback/ pause

Selecting a folder

Displaying text messages

Selecting and scanning a folder

■ Selecting a folder

Press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired folder.

■ Returning to the first file of the first folder

Press and hold “

∨

” on until you hear a beep.

■ Scanning the first file of all the folders

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.

When the desired folder is reached, press again.

289

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning files

■ Selecting a file

Turn or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired file.

■ Scanning the files in a folder

Press .

The first 10 seconds of each file will be played.

To cancel, press again.

When the desired file is reached, press again.

Playing and pausing files

Press .

Fast-forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

Random playback

■ Playing files from a folder in random order

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order

To cancel, press the button again.

290

3-2. Using the audio system

Repeat play

■ Repeating a file

To cancel, press the button twice.

■ Repeating all the files in a folder

Press (RPT) twice.

To cancel, press the button again.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title

→

Track title/Artist name

→

Track title/Album name

→

Track title/Elapsed time

■ USB memory functions

Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.

■ Error messages

“USB ERROR”:This indicates a problem in the USB memory, in the USB box or connection between them.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.

291

3-2. Using the audio system

■ USB memory

● Compatible device

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.

Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.

● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)

)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in device: 65,025

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

● MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft

audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

292

3-2. Using the audio system

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)

MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)

● File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

● MP3 and WMA playback

When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged, all files in the

USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

293

3-2. Using the audio system

● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Do not connect a USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to a USB memory

● Do not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

294

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Opt im a l use of t he a udio syst e m

Type A

Adjusting the sound quality and ASL

Type B

Selector buttons

Selector knob

Menu button

295

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the audio control function

■ Changing sound quality modes

Type A:

Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following order:

“BAS”

→

“TRE”

→

“FAD”

→

“BAL”

→

“ASL”

Type B:

Press . or corresponds to the desired mode.

“BASS”, “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”

296

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Adjusting sound quality

Type A:

Turning adjusts the level.

Mode displayed

BAS

TRE

FAD

BAL

Sound quality mode

Bass*

Treble*

Front/rear volume balance

Left/right volume balance

Level

-5 to 5

F7 to R7 Shifts to rear

L7 to R7

Turn to the left

Low

Turn to the right

High

Shifts to front

Shifts to left Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CD mode.

297

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B:

Turning adjusts the level.

Mode displayed

BASS

TREB

FADE

BAL

Sound quality mode

Bass*

Treble*

Front/rear volume balance

Left/right volume balance

Level

-5 to 5

F7 to R7 Shifts to rear

L7 to R7

Turn to the left

Low

Turn to the right

High

Shifts to front

Shifts to left Shifts to right

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

Type A:

When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the

“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.

Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

298

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B:

Press .

Press , , or as corresponds to the desired mode

(OFF, LOW, MID, or HIGH).

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

■ Setting the number of preset pages (type B only)

The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial setting is 6 pages.

Press .

3 corresponds the desired number of preset pages.

■ Language settings (type B only)

→

P. 257

■ Trademark owned by New Transducers Limited (Access Cab models with type B audio system)

This vehicle incorporates NXT flat panel speaker technology by New

Transducers Limited, UK. is a registered trademarks of New

Transducers Limited.

299

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

Operating the sub w oofer (on some Access Ca b models)

OFF

LIGHT ON

The sub woofer illumination turns on. In this position, the sub woofer operates.

300

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

U sing t he AU X por t

This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

Type A

301

3-2. Using the audio system

Type B

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.

302

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

U sing t he st e e ring w he e l a udio sw it c he s

∗

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Increases/decreases volume

Radio mode: Selects radio station

CD mode: Selects track/file, folder and disc iPod mode: Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and folder

Bluetooth

audio mode:

Selects a track and album

Turns the power on, selects an audio source

∗

: If equipped

303

3-2. Using the audio system

Turning the power on

Press when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you hear a beep.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

If no discs are inserted in the player, that mode will be skipped.

→

SAT

→

Bluetooth

audio

→

AUX

→

USB/iPod

→

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on volume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

Press and hold the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station

Press to select the radio mode.

Press “

∨

” or “

∧

” on to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold “

∨

” or “

∧

” on until you hear a beep.

304

3-2. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/file or song

Press to select the CD, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth

audio mode.

Press “

∨

” or “

∧

” on song.

to select the desired track/file or

Selecting a folder or album

Press to select the CD, USB memory or Bluetooth

® audio mode.

Press and hold “

∨

” or “

∧

” on until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

305

3 -2 . U sing t he a udio syst e m

De t a c ha ble pole a nt e nna

The antenna can be removed.

■ Removing the antenna

Place the included wrench around the antenna.

When not in use, the wrench is stored in glove box.

Loosen the antenna with the wrench and remove it.

306

3-2. Using the audio system

■ Installing the antenna

Tighten the antenna by one hand until it will not turn any more.

Using the wrench, tighten the antenna an additional 1/8th turn (20 to 45 degrees) to secure it in place.

After tightening the antenna, remove the wrench.

■ About the wrench

● A standard 5/16 in. (8 mm) wrench can also be used to install or remove the antenna.

● After using the included wrench, store it in the glove box for safekeeping.

307

3-2. Using the audio system

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the antenna

Remove the antenna in the following situations.

● When using an automatic carwash.

● When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage, etc.

● When covering the vehicle with a car cover.

■ Removing the antenna

● For normal driving, make sure the antenna is installed.

● When removing the antenna to use an automatic carwash, etc., be careful not to lose the antenna. Also, make sure to reinstall the antenna before driving the vehicle.

■ Using the wrench

● When installing or removing the antenna, use the included wrench or a standard 5/16 in. (8 mm) wrench.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the vehicle body with the wrench.

● Do not over-tighten the antenna.

Over-tightening may damage the antenna.

● Do not use pliers to install or remove the antenna.

Pliers may damage the antenna’s finish.

308

3 -3 . U sing t he Blue t oot h

Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

a udio syst e m

∗

The Bluetooth

® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth

, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth

, the Bluetooth

audio system will not function.

Title

Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

Bluetooth

audio system setup

Page

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate

● If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth

● If the portable player is switched off

● If the portable player is not connected

● If the portable player’s battery is low

● If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box

● If metal is covering or touching the portable player

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (

→

P. 353)

∗

: If equipped

309

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

■ About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Compatible models

● Bluetooth

specifications:

Ver. 1.2

● Following Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.

1.3 or higher recommended)

Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth

audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

■ Certification for the Bluetooth

audio system

FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035

IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

310

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

CAUTION

■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Radio frequency exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.

■ Caution while driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

311

3 -3 . U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

∗

■ Audio unit

Display

A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.

Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects items such as menu and number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected item

Bluetooth

connection condition

If “BT” is not displayed, the

Bluetooth

audio system cannot be used.

∗

: If equipped

312

■ Microphone

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

313

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Operating the system using voice commands

By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth

audio system without the need to check the display or operate .

■ Operation procedure when using voice commands

Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.

■ Auxiliary commands when using voice commands

The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:

“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth

audio system

“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure

“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

314

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Using the Bluetooth

audio system for the first time

Before using the Bluetooth

audio system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth

enabled portable player in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a portable player:

Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.

The introductory guidance and portable player name registration instructions are heard.

Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or .

, and say the name to b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.

A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.

Input the passkey into the portable player.

Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the operation of the portable player.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

If the portable player has a Bluetooth

phone, the phone can be registered at the same time. (

→

P. 333)

315

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Menu list of the Bluetooth

audio system

■ Normal operation

First menu

Second menu

Third menu Operation detail

“Setup”

“BT

•

Setup”

“System

Setup”

“Pair Audio

Player”

“Select Audio

Player”

“Change Name”

“List Audio Players”

“Set Passkey”

“Delete Audio”

“Guidance Volume”

“Device Name”

Registering a portable player

Selecting a portable player to be used

Changing the registered name of a portable player

Listing the registered portable players

Changing the passkey

Deleting a registered portable player

Setting voice guidance volume

Displaying the Bluetooth

® device address and name

Initializing the system “Initialize”

“BT• A Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or saying the voice command, “Cancel”.

316

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.

Say the command correctly and clearly.

■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice

● When driving on rough roads

● When driving at high speeds

● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving

● Operating the system with

● Registering a portable player to the system

■ Changing the passkey

→

P. 323

317

3 -3 . U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

Ope rat ing a Blue t oot h

e na ble d por t a ble pla ye r

∗

Power Volume

Selector buttons

Selecting a track

Fast-forwarding and reversing/

Selecting a track

Playback Playback/ pause

Selecting an album

Displaying text messages

Selecting an album

Press “

∨

” or “

∧

” on

Selecting tracks

Turn or press “

∧

” or “

∨

” on to select the desired track.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press .

∗

: If equipped

318

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks

Press and hold “

∧

” or “

∨

” on .

Switching the display

Press .

Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following order:

Track title

→

Track title/Artist name

→

Track title/Album name

→

Track title/Elapsed time

Using the steering wheel audio switches

→

P. 303

■ Bluetooth

audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

■ Error messages

“BT AUDIO ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the system.

319

3 -3 . U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

Se t t ing up a Blue t oot h

e na ble d por t a ble pla ye r

∗

Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth

audio system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered portable players:

■ Functions and operation procedures

Press until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.

Select one of the following functions using a voice command or .

● Registering a portable player

“Pair Audio Player”

● Selecting a portable player to be used

“Select Audio Player”

● Changing the registered name

“Change Name”

● Listing the registered portable players

“List Audio Players”

● Changing the passkey

“Set Passkey”

● Deleting a registered portable player

“Delete Audio Player”

∗

: If equipped

320

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Registering a portable player

Select “Pair Audio Player” using a voice command or , and perform the procedure for registering a portable player. (

→

P. 315)

Selecting a portable player to be used

Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or

Select the portable player to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.

Press the talk switch and say “From Car” or “From Audio”, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically connected whenever the engine switch is in either the ACC or ON position.

321

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Changing the registered name of a portable player

Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .

Select the name of the portable player to be changed by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of desired portable player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using and say the new name.

Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .

322

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Listing the registered portable players

Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or . The list of registered portable players will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT• A Setup”.

Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will become available:

● Selecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”

● Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

● Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player”

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .

Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select

“Confirm” using a voice command or .

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is not necessary.

323

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Deleting a registered portable player

Select “Delete Audio Player” using a voice command or

Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or

: a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired portable player.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List Audio Players”. When the name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the talk switch.

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth

phone, the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.

A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

■ The number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

324

3 -3 . U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

Blue t oot h

®

a udio syst e m se t up

∗

■ System setup items and operation procedures

● Setting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Guidance Volume”

(

→

P. 352)

● Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Device Name”

(

→

P. 353)

● Initialization

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Initialize”

(

→

P. 353)

∗

: If equipped

325

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

H a nds-fre e phone syst e m fe a t ure s

∗

This system supports Bluetooth

, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

■ Hands-free system quick guide

Setting a cellular phone. (

→

P. 330)

Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be stored). (

→

P. 355)

Dialing by inputting a name. (

→

P. 340)

326

∗

: If equipped

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Title

Using the hands-free phone system

■ Operating the system by using a voice command

■ Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

■ Menu list of the hands-free phone system

Making a phone call

■ Dialing by inputting a number

■ Dialing by inputting a name

■ Speed dialing

■ When receiving a phone call

■ Transferring a call

■ Using the call history memory

Setting a cellular phone

■ Registering a cellular phone

■ Selecting the cellular phone to be used

■ Changing a registered name

■ Listing the registered cellular phones

■ Changing the passkey

■ Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off

Security and system setup

■ Setting or changing the PIN

■ Locking or unlocking the phone book

■ Setting voice guidance volume

■ Initialization

Using the phone book

■ Adding a new phone number

■ Setting speed dials

■ Changing a registered name

■ Deleting registered data

■ Deleting speed dials

■ Listing the registered data

Page

327

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situations:

● The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.

● The cellular phone has a low battery.

● The cellular phone is not connected to the system.

● The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal material covers or touches the phone.

■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed.

■ Required profiles for the cellular phone

● HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0

● OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

■ For detailed information about Hands-free Phone System

For assistance with pairing and operating your cell phone, go to the website www.toyota.letstalk.com.

■ About Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

■ Certification for the hands-free phone system

FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035

IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035

MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 Rules.

328

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

CAUTION

■ FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

■ Caution while driving

Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth

phone.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to a cellular phone

Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become high resulting in damage to the phone.

329

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m

∗

■ Audio unit

Display

A message, name, phone number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and special characters, such as an umlaut, cannot be displayed.

Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as menu or number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected item

Bluetooth

connection condition and reception level

If “BT” is not displayed, the hands-free phone system cannot be used.

∗

: If equipped

330

■ Steering wheel

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Volume

The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.

Off-hook switch

Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call

On-hook switch

Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call

Talk switch

Turns the voice command system on (press)/turns the voice command system off

(press and hold)

331

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Microphone

332

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Operating the system by using a voice command

By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone system without the need to check the display or operate .

■ Operation procedure when using a voice command

Press the talk switch and follow the voice guidance instructions.

■ Auxiliary commands when using a voice command

The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the system using a voice command:

“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system

“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction

“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure

“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is registered for the selected function

Using the hands-free phone system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:

Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.

The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are heard.

Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .

333

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be registered.

b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.

A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

Registration to the hands-free phone system only

Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or .

Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth

® audio system at the same time

Select “Internal Audio (Int. Audio)” using a voice command or

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

Guidance for registration completion is heard.

334

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Menu list of the hands-free phone system

■ Normal operation

First menu

Second menu

Third menu

“Callback”

“Redial”

Operation detail

Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory

Dialing a number stored in the outgoing call history memory

“Dial by number”

“Dial by name”

Dialing by inputting a number

Dialing by inputting a name registered in the phone book

“Phonebook”

“Add

Entry”

“Change

Name”

“Delete

Entry”

“Delete

Speed

Dial”

“List

Names”

“Set

Speed

Dial”

(Speed

Dial)

Adding a new number

Changing a name in the phone book

Deleting the phone book data

Deleting a registered speed dial

Listing the phone book data

Registering a speed dial

335

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

First menu

“Setup”

Second menu

“Security”

“Phone

Setup”

“System

Setup”

Third menu Operation detail

“Set PIN”

“Phonebook

Lock”

“Phonebook

Unlock”

Setting a PIN code

Locking the phone book

Unlocking the phone book

“Pair Phone”

“Change

Name”

“Delete

Phone”

“List phones”

Listing the registered cellular phones

“Select phone”

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Hands-free power”

Setting the hands-free power on/off

“Guidance

Volume”

“Device

Name”

“Initialize”

Registering the cellular phone to be used

Changing a registered name of a cellular phone

Deleting a registered cellular phone

Setting voice guidance volume

Displaying device information

Initialization

336

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Using a short cut key

First menu Second menu

“Dial XXX (name)”

“Dial XXX (number)”

“Phone book add entry”

“Phone book change name”

Operation detail

Dialing a number registered in the phone book

Dialing the input numbers

Adding a new number

Changing the name of a phone number in the phone book

Deleting phone book data

“Phone book delete entry”

“Phone book set speed dial”

“Phone book delete speed dial”

“Phonebook”

Registering a speed dial

Deleting a speed dial

“Phonebook Unlock” Unlocking the phone book

“Phonebook Lock” Locking the phone book

337

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

■ When using a voice command

For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),

∗

(star), and + (plus).

Say a command correctly and clearly.

■ Situations that the system may not recognize your voice

● When driving on a rough road

● When driving at high speeds

● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone

● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

■ Operations that cannot be performed while driving

● Operating the system with

● Registering a cellular phone to the system

■ Changing the passkey

→

P. 348

338

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

M a k ing a phone c a ll

∗

■ Making a phone call

● Dialing by inputting a number

“Dial by number”

● Dialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

● Speed dialing

● Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

● Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

“Call back”

■ Receiving a phone call

● Answering the phone

● Refusing the call

■ Transferring a call

■ Using the call history memory

● Dialing

● Storing data in the phone book

● Deleting

∗

: If equipped

339

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Dialing by inputting a number

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.

Press the talk switch and say the phone number.

Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Dialing by inputting a name

Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.

Select a registered name to be input by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk switch while the desired name is being read aloud.

Dial by one of the following methods: a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.

c. Select “Dial” by using .

Speed dialing

Press the off-hook switch.

Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.

Press the off-hook switch.

340

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

When receiving a phone call

■ Answering the phone

Press the off-hook switch.

■ Refusing the call

Press the on-hook switch.

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods: a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch

c. Press the talk switch and say “Call Transfer”

: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from the system to the cellular phone.

341

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using the call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history memory:

Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back”

(when using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).

Select the number by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is displayed.

b. Select the desired number by using .

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” by using a voice command or .

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice command or .

Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .

342

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call history memories.

■ When talking on the phone

● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.

● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.

343

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

Se t t ing a c e llula r phone

∗

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered cellular phones:

■ Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a voice command or :

● Registering a cellular phone

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Pair Phone”

● Selecting the cellular phone to be used

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Select Phone”

● Changing a registered name

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Change Name”

● Listing the registered cellular phones

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “List Phones”

● Deleting a cellular phone

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Delete Phone”

● Changing the passkey

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Set Passkey”

● Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Phone Setup”

→

3. “Hands-free power”

∗

: If equipped

344

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or procedure for registering a cellular phone. (

→

P. 333)

Selecting the cellular phone to be used

, and do the

Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .

Pattern A

Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the talk switch.

Pattern B

Select the cellular phone to be used by using .

345

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk switch.

c. Select the desired phone name by using .

Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” by using and say a new name.

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

346

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Listing the registered cellular phones

Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or causes the list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be available:

• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”

Deleting a cellular phone

Select “Delete Phone” by using a voice command or .

Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellular phone.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the talk switch.

347

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .

Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press again.

Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off

■ Turning off the automatic connection

Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or

Select “Turn off” by using a voice command or .

348

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Turning on the automatic connection

Select “Handsfree Power” by using a voice command or

Select “Turn on” by using a voice command or .

■ The number of cellular phones that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

349

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

Se c urit y a nd syst e m se t up

∗

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

■ Security setting items and operation procedure

● Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Security”

→

3. “Set PIN”

● Locking the phone book

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Security”

→

3. “Phonebook Lock”

● Unlocking the phone book

1. “Setup”

→

2. “Security”

→

3. “Phonebook Unlock”

■ System setup items and operation procedure

● Setting voice guidance volume

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Guidance Volume”

● Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Device Name”

● Initialization

1. “Setup”

→

2. “System Setup”

→

3. “Initialize”

can only be used for system setup operation.

∗

: If equipped

350

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting or changing the PIN

■ Setting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .

When using

■ Changing the PIN

, input the code 1 digit at a time.

Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .

Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or .

Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .

When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.

351

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phonebook lock” or “Phonebook unlock” by using a voice command or .

Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or : a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.

b. Input a new PIN by using .

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “Guidance Volume” by using

Change the voice guidance volume.

To decrease the volume: Turn

counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

352

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

Select “Device Name” using .

Turn name.

to display the Bluetooth

Select “Go Back” using

device address and

to return to “System Setup”.

Initialization

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using .

Select “Confirm” by using .

353

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Initialization

● The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming call history

• Speed dials

• Registered cellular phone data

• Security code

● Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its original state.

■ When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

● Dialing by inputting a name

● Speed dialing

● Dialing a number stored in the call history memory

● Using the phone book

354

3 -4 . U sing t he ha nds-fre e phone syst e m (for c e llula r phone )

U sing t he phone book

∗

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:

● Adding a new phone number

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Add Entry”

● Setting speed dial

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

● Changing a registered name

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Change Name”

● Deleting registered data

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Delete Entry”

● Deleting speed dial

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “Delete Speed Dial”

● Listing the registered data

1. “Phonebook”

→

2. “List Names”

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

● Inputting a phone number by using a voice command

● Transferring data from the cellular phone

● Inputting a phone number by using

● Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

∗

: If equipped

355

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Adding procedure

Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:

Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command

STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

Transferring data from the cellular phone

STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

b. Select the desired data by using .

356

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Inputting a phone number by using

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press

once again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice command or .

STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the following methods: a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command.

b. Select the desired data by using .

357

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Select the name to be registered by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.

b. Select “Record Name” by using name.

, and say the desired

Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of

“Confirm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.

358

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting speed dials

Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command or .

Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the talk switch, say desired number, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,

3 and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired data by using .

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed dial by either of the following methods: a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

359

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing a registered name

Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .

Select the name to be changed by either of the following methods.

a. Press the talk switch, say desired name, and select

“Confirm” by using a voice command or .

b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

c. Select the desired name by using .

Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.

Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .

360

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Deleting registered data

Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .

Select the data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

: a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired phone number to be deleted.

b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name of the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the talk switch.

Deleting speed dials

Select “Delete Speed Dial” by using a voice command or

Press the preset button for which the desired speed dial is registered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or

361

3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Listing the registered data

Selecting “List names” by using a voice command causes a list of the registered data to be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud selects the data, and the following functions will be available.

• Dialing: “Dial”

• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”

• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”

• Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”

■ Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

362

3 -5 . U sing t he int e rior light s

I nt e rior light s list

Interior light (

→

P. 364)

Personal lights (Access Cab and Double Cab models) (

→

P. 364)

■ Illuminated entry system

When the interior light switch is in the DOOR position, the interior light automatically turns on/off according to whether the doors are locked/unlocked and whether the doors are open/closed.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

If the interior light remains on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light switch is in the DOOR position, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

363

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior light

Interior light and personal lights

DOOR position

OFF

Personal lights (Access Cab and Double Cab models)

On/off

364

3 -6 . U sing t he st ora ge fe a t ure s

List of st ora ge fe a t ure s

Glove box

Overhead console (Access Cab and Double Cab models)

Bottle holders

Auxiliary boxes

Front console box (separated type front seat only)

Cup holders

CAUTION

■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

365

3-6. Using the storage features

Glove box

Glove box and front console box

Pull up the lever.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Front console box (Separated type front seat only)

Push the button.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

366

Cup holders

Type A (Bench type front seat)

3-6. Using the storage features

Cup holders

Type B (Separated type front seats with an automatic transmission)

Type C (Separated type front seats with a manual transmission)

367

3-6. Using the storage features

■ Removing the cup holder

Type A (Bench type front seat)

Pull the cup holder up.

Cup holders

Type B (Separated type front seats with an automatic transmission)

Pull the cup holder up.

CAUTION

■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

368

3-6. Using the storage features

Bottle holders

Bottle holders

Front

Front console box (Separated type front seat)

Rear (Double Cab models)

■ Bottle holders

Depending on their size or shape, some bottles may not fit in the holders.

369

3-6. Using the storage features

Bottle holders and auxiliary boxes

NOTICE

■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Auxiliary boxes

Front

Pull the lid down.

Under the rear seats (Access Cab models)

Pull up the lever.

Raise the bottom cushion up.

370

3-6. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

Press the lid against the bottom of the lower cushion until it is supported by the hookand-loop fastener.

Make sure that the lid is supported to prevent it from closing unexpectedly.

Under the rear seats (Double Cab models)

Swing the bottom cushion up by pulling the lock release strap.

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

371

3-6. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes and overhead console

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed and locked.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Overhead console (Access Cab and Double Cab models)

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

Pull the lid down while pushing the knob.

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the overhead console closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

■ Items unsuitable for storing

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.

372

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Sun visors

Type A

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Type B

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Side extender:

Place in side position, then slide backwards.

373

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Va nit y m ir rors

Vehicles without vanity light

Vehicles with vanity light

Slide the cover.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

374

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Cloc k

Adjusts the hours

Adjusts the minutes

■ The clock is displayed when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

375

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Outside temperature display (vehicles w ith auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

The temperature display shows temperatures within the ranges of

-40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).

■ Outside temperature display

Type A

Type B

■ Ice advisory indicator

If the outside temperature lowers to 37°F (3°C) or below when the engine switch is in the ON position, the indicator will come on to warn the driver that roads may be icy. Check the road surface and drive carefully. (The indicator will go off when the outside temperature rises to 41°F [5°C].)

376

3-7. Other interior features

Changing the display

The outside temperature display on the inside rear view mirror can be turned on/off and the display units can be changed.

■ Turning the outside temperature display on/off

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

to display “Custom Settings

Type B: Press to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Outside Temperature”, then press and hold

Type B: Press and select

“Outside Temperature”, then press .

Type A: Press and select

“Temperature Display”.

Type B: Press and select

“Temperature Display”.

Type A: Press and hold

Type B: Press

and select display on/off.

To leave the “Temperature Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select

“Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

377

3-7. Other interior features

■ Changing display units

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

Type B: Press

to display “Custom Settings

to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Outside Temperature”, then press and hold

Type B: Press and select

“Outside Temperature”, then press .

Type A: Press

“Units”.

Type B: Press

“Units”.

and select

Type A: Press and hold

Type B: Press

and select the desired units.

To leave the “Temperature Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select

“Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

378

3-7. Other interior features

Setting the ice advisory indicator

The ice advisory indicator on the inside rear view mirror can be turned on/off.

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

Type B: Press

to display “Custom Settings

to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Ice Advisory”.

Type B: Press and select

“Ice Advisory”.

Type A: Press and hold

Type B: Press

and select display on/off.

To leave the “Temperature Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select

“Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

379

3-7. Other interior features

■ The outside temperature is displayed when

The engine switch is in the ON position.

■ Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:

● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph

[25 km/h])

● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

■ When “– –” or “– – –” is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ Customization that can be configured for the inside rear view mirror display

Settings (e.g. layout) can be changed.

(Customizable features

→

P. 583)

380

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Pow e r out le t s (1 2 V DC)

The power outlets can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than 10A.

■ The power outlets can be used when

The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position.

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlets lid when not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

381

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Pow e r out le t (1 2 0 V AC)

∗

The power outlet can be used for electrical appliances.

Main switch

To use the power outlet, turn on the main switch.

The power supply starts a few seconds after the main switch is pressed.

Power outlet socket

Maximum available capacity of the power outlet

382

■ While the vehicle is being driven

The maximum capacity of the power outlet is always 120V AC/

100W.

■ When the vehicle is stationary

The maximum capacity of the power outlet varies depending on the following conditions.

● The maximum capacity is 120V AC/400W when the following condition applies:

• The shift lever is in P or N. (automatic transmission)

∗

: If equipped

3-7. Other interior features

• The shift lever is in N and the clutch pedal is not depressed.

(manual transmission)

A maximum capacity of 400W can only be restored by turning the power outlet main switch off and then on again under condition described above.

● The maximum capacity is 120V AC/100W when the following condition applies:

• The shift lever is moved to any positions other than P and N.

(automatic transmission)

• The clutch pedal is depressed. (manual transmission)

■ The power outlet can be used when

The engine is started.

■ The indicator light changes according the maximum available capacity, as follows:

Indicates 120V AC/400W

Indicates 120V AC/100W

■ When the power outlet is in operation

The sound of the cooling fan may be heard from the front console box. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

■ If the engine is started with the power outlet main switch on

The maximum capacity of the power supply may decrease to below the standard, or may be cut off completely, even when the vehicle is stationary.

383

3-7. Other interior features

■ The protection circuit may be activated to cut the power supply if any of the following conditions apply:

● The engine is started with the power outlet main switch on.

● Use of electrical appliances exceeding the maximum capacity is attempted.

A sound may be heard when the protection circuit is activated.

This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

● Electrical appliances, which consume power exceeding 100W, have been used continuously for a long time period.

● The total power usage by all electrical features (headlights, air conditioning, etc.) has exceeded the total vehicle maximum for an extended period of time.

■ If the protection circuit is activated and the power supply is cut, conduct the following procedure:

Park the vehicle in a safe place, and then securely apply the parking brake.

Check and ensure the following conditions:

• The shift lever is in P or N. (automatic transmission)

• The shift lever is in N and the clutch pedal is not depressed.

(manual transmission)

Make sure that the power consumption of the electric appliance is within the maximum capacity of the power outlet and the appliance is not broken.

Press the power outlet main switch again.

When the cabin temperature is high, open the windows to cool the temperature down. Once it reaches the normal temperature, turn the power outlet main switch on again.

If the power supply is not resumed even after performing the above procedure, have the vehicle inspected by a Toyota dealer.

384

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ Using a power outlet

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.

● Use of the power outlet when it is wet with rain, drinking water or snow may result in electrical shocks and is extremely dangerous. The power outlet must be thoroughly dried before use.

● Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet.

● Be careful not to get any part of your body caught in the power outlet lid.

● When using electrical appliances, strictly follow any cautions and notices written on their labels and in the manufacturers’ instruction manuals.

● Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet or its inverter, in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunctions or accidents, which could cause serious damage or injuries. Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary repairs.

■ To prevent injuries and accidents, securely fix all electric appliances before use and do not use any appliances that may do any of the following:

● Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving.

● Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating while driving.

● Emit steam, while the windows of the cabin are closed.

■ To prevent unexpected accidents, such as electric shocks, do not perform any of the following

● Using the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping.

● Contaminating the power outlet with liquid substances or mud.

● Handling electrical appliance plugs at the power outlet with wet hands or feet.

● Inserting foreign objects into the power outlet.

● Using malfunctioning electric appliances.

● Inserting inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet.

385

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the power outlet and the plug

● Close the power outlet lid when not in use.

● Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

● Do not use plug adaptors to connect too many plugs to the power outlet.

● After inserting a plug, gently close the power outlet lid.

■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use a 120V AC appliance that requires more than maximum capacity.

If a 120V AC appliance that consumes more than maximum capacity is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.

■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120V AC)

The following 120V AC appliances may not operate even if their power consumption is under maximum capacity.

● Appliances with high initial peak wattage

● Measuring devices that process precise data

● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

■ To prevent the battery from being discharged

Turn off all the vehicle’s electronic equipment and accessories, such as the headlights and air conditioning, when electrical appliances that consume in excess of 100W are used continuously for long periods of time.

■ To prevent any damage caused by heat

● Do not use any electrical appliances that give off intense heat such as toasters, in any locations including the internal or external trim, seats and deck.

● Do not use any electrical appliances, which are easily affected by vibration or heat, inside the vehicle.

Vibration while driving, or the heat of the sun while parking, may result in damage to those electrical appliances.

386

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE

■ If any electrical appliances are to be used while driving

Securely fasten both the appliances and their cables to prevent them from falling or getting caught any of the power train components.

■ If the power outlet is loose when an electrical appliance plug is connected

Replace the outlet.

Contact a Toyota dealer for any necessary replacements.

■ If the power outlet gets dirty

Turn the main switch off and use a soft, clean cloth to wipe it gently.

Do not use any cleansing materials, such as organic solvents, wax, or compound cleaners, as these may damage the power outlet or cause it to malfunction.

387

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Se a t ba c k t a ble

∗

Front passenger’s seatback can be used as a temporary table only when the vehicle is stopped.

Fold down the front passenger’s seat to use the seatback table. (

→

P. 51)

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury.

● Do not set up the seatback table.

● Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback table.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the seatback table

Do not put heavy loads on the table.

∗

: If equipped

388

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Floor m a t

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

389

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

■ When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■ Before driving

● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

● With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or N

(manual transmission), fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

390

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Lugga ge c om pa r t m e nt fe a t ure s

Behind the rear seat (Double Cab models only)

Cargo net hooks (vehicles with sub woofer)

Grocery bag hooks

Flashlight holder

Storage boxes

Deck

Auxiliary boxes

Tie-down cleats

Deck hooks

391

3-7. Other interior features

Auxiliary boxes

Left side

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

Right side (vehicles without 120V power outlet)

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

Right side (vehicles with 120V power outlet)

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

392

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ Caution while driving

Keep the auxiliary boxes closed and locked.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Deck hooks

Deck hooks are provided for securing loose items.

CAUTION

■ When not in use

Keep the deck hooks folded.

393

3-7. Other interior features

Tie-down cleats

The deck rail system enables you to insert and move tie-down cleats to their best location along deck rails to secure a load.

Locking plate

Thumb wheel

Tie-down cleat

■ Installing the tie-down cleat

0.5 in.

(12.7 mm)

Loosen the thumb wheel in a counterclockwise motion, and depress the wheel so that the locking plate maintains 0.5 in.

(12.7 mm) gap.

Deck rail

Detent

Locking plate

394

3-7. Other interior features

Insert the locking plate into the deck rail, rotate the tie-down cleat 90°, and release the thumb wheel.

Slide the cleat to the closest detent in the rail system. You will feel that the locking plate snaps into a detent.

Tighten the thumb wheel in a clockwise motion until the clutch mechanism ratchets.

Check the tie-down cleat to confirm that it is locked into a detent and securely mounted to the deck rail system.

395

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ Tie-down cleat precautions

● Properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats into the deck rail system.

Failure to properly install and tighten the tie-down cleats can cause cargo to become unsecured. Unsecured cargo can cause injury when the vehicle is in motion.

● Properly secure all cargo to prevent shifting or sliding during driving.

Failure to properly secure cargo can cause injury when the vehicle is in motion.

● Applying loads at an angle to the tie-down cleat greater than 45° or loads greater than 220 lb. (100 kg) may cause damage to the deck, deck rail system, tie-down cleat and/or the cargo.

● Do not exceed a total tensile load of 440 lb. (200 kg) per deck rail.

● Do not install more than the following number of tie-down cleats per deck rail:

• Side rail:

Short deck—Max. 3 locations

Long deck—Max. 4 locations

• Headboard rail: Max. 3 locations

Storage boxes (Double Cab models only)

Storage box is designed to place things like bottles.

Right side (vehicles without sub woofer)

396

3-7. Other interior features

Left side

■ Removing the separator

Remove the separator.

It can be installed in various positions as required.

Flashlight holder (Double Cab models only)

Flashlight holder is designed to hold the flashlight securely.

397

3-7. Other interior features

■ Removing the flashlight holder

Remove the flashlight holder.

It can be installed in various positions as required.

Grocery bag hooks (Double Cab models only)

Grocery bag hook is designed to hang things like grocery bag.

NOTICE

■ Grocery bag hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 7 lb. (3 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.

398

3-7. Other interior features

Cargo net hooks (Double Cab models with sub woofer)

Cargo net hooks are designed to hang the factory-supplied cargo net.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to the cargo net hook

Do not hang items other than the cargo net.

399

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Ga ra ge door ope ne r

∗

The garage door opener can be trained to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.

The training procedure is displayed on the inside rear view mirror display screen.

The garage door opener (HomeLink

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink

Training the HomeLink

(for U.S. owners)

The HomeLink

compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be trained to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the training method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator light

Buttons

∗

: If equipped

400

3-7. Other interior features

■ Training the HomeLink

Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink

® control buttons.

Keep the indicator on the

HomeLink

in view while training.

Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink

and the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator on the

HomeLink

changes from a slow to a rapid flash, you can release both buttons.

If the HomeLink

indicator comes on but does not flash, or flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and remains lit, the HomeLink

® button is already trained. Use the other buttons or follow the “Retraining a

HomeLink

® button” instructions.

(

→

P. 405)

401

3-7. Other interior features

Test the operation of the

HomeLink

by pressing the newly trained button.

If training a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the

Rolling Code type. Press and hold the trained HomeLink

® button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator

(on the HomeLink

) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Training a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to train another device for each of the remaining HomeLink

buttons.

402

3-7. Other interior features

■ Training a Rolling Code system (for U.S. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Training the HomeLink

” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

Locate the learn button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the learning button.

Press the learning button.

Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

Press and hold the vehicle’s trained HomeLink

button for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the training process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the training process by opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink

transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to train another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink

buttons.

403

3-7. Other interior features

■ Training an entry gate (for U.S. owners)/Training a device in the Canadian market

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the HomeLink

buttons

Keep the HomeLink

indicator light in view while training.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink

button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) one of the buttons on the remote control transmitter for 2 seconds at a time until

is completed.

When the HomeLink

indicator light starts to flash rapidly, release the buttons on the HomeLink

Test the HomeLink

operation by pressing the newly trained button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to train another device for any of the remaining HomeLink

buttons.

■ Training other devices

To train other devices such as home security systems, home door locks and lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.

■ Retraining a button

The individual HomeLink

buttons cannot be erased but can be retrained. To retrain a button, follow the “Retraining a HomeLink

® button” instructions.

404

3-7. Other interior features

Operating HomeLink

Press the appropriate HomeLink

button. The HomeLink

indicator light should come on.

The HomeLink

compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Retraining a HomeLink

button

Press and hold the desired HomeLink

® button. After 20 seconds, the

HomeLink

indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the

HomeLink

button and then follow the “Training the HomeLink

(for

U.S. owners)” instructions. (

→

P. 400)

Erasing the entire HomeLink

memory (all three programs)

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the indicator flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

memory.

405

3-7. Other interior features

■ Before training

● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.

● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink

button.

■ Certification for the garage door opener

FCC ID: NZLGHSHL4

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

406

3-7. Other interior features

■ If the following message is displayed

This message appears when training procedures have not been performed correctly. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete or cancel training.

Pattern A

Pattern B

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

407

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ When training a garage door or other remote control devices

The garage door or other devices may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink

compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

408

3 -7 . Ot he r int e rior fe a t ure s

Compass (vehicles w ith auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

■ Location

Type A

Type B

409

3-7. Other interior features

■ Displays and directions

Display

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

410

Calibrating the compass

3-7. Other interior features

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending on the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in the illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibration”.

Turning the compass display on/off

The compass display on the inside rear view mirror can be turned on/off and the country and region settings can be changed.

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

Type B: Press

to display “Custom Settings

to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

411

3-7. Other interior features

Type A: Press and select

“Compass”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Compass”, then press

Type A: Press and select

“Compass Display”.

Type B: Press and select

“Compass Display”.

Type A: Press and hold

Type B: Press

and select display on/off.

To leave the “Compass Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

Deviation calibration

Stop the vehicle.

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

Type B: Press

to display “Custom Settings

to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Compass”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Compass”, then press

412

3-7. Other interior features

Type A: Press and select

“Zone”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Zone”, then press

changes each time

is pressed.

Select the country, then press and hold to confirm.

3 changes each time

is pressed.

Select the country, then

Type A: The selected region changes each time

is pressed.

Select the region, then press and hold confirm.

Type B: The selected region changes each time

is pressed.

Select the region, then

To leave the “Compass Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

413

3-7. Other interior features

Circling calibration

If “C” appears on the display, circling calibration needs to be performed.

Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

to display “Custom Settings

Type B: Press to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Compass”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Compass”, then press

Type A: Press and select

“Calibrate”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Calibrate”, then press

“C” appears on the display.

414

3-7. Other interior features

Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until a direction is displayed.

To leave the “Compass Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:

● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

● The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

● The battery has been disconnected.

● A door is open.

415

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION

■ While driving the vehicle

Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

■ When doing the circling calibration

Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.

Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE

■ To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.

■ When doing the circling calibration

● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

416

4 -1 . M a int e na nc e a nd c a re

Cle a ning a nd prot e c t ing t he ve hicle ex t e rior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

● Wipe away any water.

● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■ Automatic car washes

● Fold the mirrors and remove the detachable pole antenna before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the detachable pole antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

● In certain automatic car washes, the roof antenna (if equipped) may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the roof antenna.

■ High pressure car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

418

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Aluminum or chrome cladded wheels (if equipped)

● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.

● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

■ Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

■ Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum or chrome cladded wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

419

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

● Clean the drainage hole of the deck regularly.

If the drainage hole is stopped up, the water will not be able to flow, and it will cause rust.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights

● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ Detachable pole antenna installation and removal precautions

● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.

● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.

420

4 -1 . M a int e na nc e a nd c a re

Cle a ning a nd prot e c t ing t he ve hicle int e rior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it in top condition:

■ Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

■ Cleaning the leather areas

● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

■ Synthetic leather areas

● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

421

4-1. Maintenance and care

■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

■ Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

→

P. 90)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

422

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■ Cleaning detergents

● Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.

● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

423

4 -2 . M a int e na nc e

M a int e na nc e re quire m e nt s

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.

■ General maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

■ Scheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

424

4-2. Maintenance

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■ Warning in handling of battery

● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

→

P. 448)

425

4 -2 . M a int e na nc e

Ge ne ra l m a int e na nc e

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your

Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Power steering fluid

Radiator/condenser/hoses

Washer fluid

Check points

Maintenance-free.

(

→

P. 448)

At the correct level? (

→

P. 444)

At the correct level?

(

→

P. 443)

At the correct level?

(

→

P. 438)

No fumes or strange sounds?

At the correct level?

(

→

P. 446)

Not blocked with foreign matter?

(

→

P. 444)

At the correct level?

(

→

P. 450)

426

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Clutch pedal

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Check points

• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?

• Not pull to one side when applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have correct amount of free play?

• Move smoothly and lock securely?

• Function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?

• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

427

4-2. Maintenance

Steering wheel

Items Check points

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

Vehicle exterior

Doors

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Items

Tire

Check points

• Operate smoothly?

• The lock system works properly?

• Is there any leakage after parking?

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?

• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION

■ If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

428

4 -2 . M a int e na nc e

Emission inspec tion and ma inte na nce (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/

M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:

● When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

429

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Do-it -yourse lf se r vic e pre c a ut ions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures as given in these sections.

Fuses

Items

Battery condition

Brake fluid level

Engine oil level

(

→

P. 448)

(

→

P. 444)

Engine coolant level (

→

P. 443)

(→

P. 438)

(

→

P. 474)

Parts and tools

• Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, nonamine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.

• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding oil)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

430

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

Items

(

Power steering fluid level

(

→

P. 484)

P. 446)

Parts and tools

• Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Conventional wrench

• Automatic transmission fluid

DEXRON

II or III

• Rag or paper towel

⎯

Radiator and condenser

(

→

P. 444)

Tire inflation pressure (

Washer fluid

→

P. 461)

(

→

P. 450)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

• Water

• Washer fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

431

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury observe the following precautions.

■ When working on the engine compartment

● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

■ When working near the cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off.

With the engine switch on, the cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.

■ Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

432

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ If you remove the air cleaner

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

433

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

H ood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the hood catch lever and lift the hood.

434

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.

CAUTION

■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■ After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.

NOTICE

■ When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.

435

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Engine c om pa r t m e nt

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

436

Washer fluid tank (

→

P. 450)

Radiator cap

Engine coolant reservoir

(

→

P. 443)

Engine oil filler cap

(

→

P. 439)

Power steering fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 446)

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→

P. 438)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 444)

Fuse box

Battery

(

→

P. 474)

(

→

P. 448)

Condenser

Radiator

(

→

P. 444)

(

→

P. 444)

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid tank (

→

P. 450)

Power steering fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 446)

Radiator cap

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→

P. 438)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

→

P. 443)

Engine oil filler cap

(

→

P. 439)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→

P. 444)

Fuse box

Battery

(

→

P. 474)

(

→

P. 448)

Condenser

Radiator

(

→

P. 444)

(

→

P. 444)

437

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

438

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

Low

Full

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Low

Full

■ Adding engine oil

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

439

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection

→

P. 556

Items Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap, turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly.

Checking the dipstick.

Reinstall the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level between low and full on the dipstick is indicated as follows:

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

1.4 qt. (1.3 L, 1.1 lmp. qt.)

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)

440

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Engine oil consumption

● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

● A new engine consumes more oil.

● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (1.0 L/1000 km, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles)

● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles

(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.

■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

Switch the display to the trip meter A when the engine is running.

(

→

P. 157)

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

While pressing the ODO/TRIP button (

→

P. 157), turn the engine switch to the ON position. Continue to press and hold the button until the odometer displays 000000.

If the system fails to reset, the light will continue flashing.

441

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Used engine oil

● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

■ When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

442

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

FULL line

LOW line

If the level is on or below the

LOW line, add coolant up to the

FULL line.

■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31

F [-35

C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44

F [-42

C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

443

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Brake fluid

■ Checking fluid level

Type A

The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

MAX line

MIN line

444

Type B

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAX line

MIN line

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Rag or paper towel

Type B only

Turn the engine off.

Depress the brake pedal 20 times or more.

Remove the reservoir cap.

Add newly opened brake fluid up to the MAX line.

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

445

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

■ If you spill fluid

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

Power steering fluid

■ Fluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

446

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 104°F - 175°F [40°C - 80°C])

Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 32°F - 104°F [0°C - 40°C])

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 minutes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C])

Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C])

■ Checking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type

Items

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

II or III

Rag or paper towel

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinstall and remove the reservoir cap again.

Check the fluid level.

447

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Checking the fluid level

Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.

NOTICE

■ When adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.

■ After replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

Battery

■ Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

448

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

CAUTION

■ Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:

● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

● Keep children away from the battery.

■ Where to safety charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■ How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less).

The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

449

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■ When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work, the washer tank may be empty.

Open the lid.

450

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Add washer fluid.

CAUTION

■ When refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

451

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

T ire s

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

■ Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the

“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.

■ Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Vehicles with P215/70R15 and P265/70R16 tires: Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.

■ The tire pressure warning system

Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (

→

P. 508)

452

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (

→

P. 454)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:

● Vehicles with P215/70R15 and P265/70R16 tires: When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

● When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

● When changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

→

P. 564)

Ma ke sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to the ON position.

453

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the ON position, and then turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your

Toyota dealer.

454

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

■ Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire (

→

P. 572).

Regular Cab and Double Cab models

455

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Access Cab models

■ Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

→

P. 219)

■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

456

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

457

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

FCC ID: PAXPMV107J

PAXPMV108J

FCC ID: HYQ13BCX

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

458

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

● Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

459

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (

→

P. 453)

■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

460

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

T ire infla t ion pre ssure

■ Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

→

P. 564)

Regular Cab and Double Cab models

461

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Access Cab models

462

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust inflate the tire.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Reinstall the tire valve cap.

463

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

● Reduced fuel efficiency

● Reduced driving comfort and tire life

● Reduced safety

● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

464

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

● Excessive wear

● Uneven wear

● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

465

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Whe e ls

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

■ Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using:

● Wheels of different sizes or types

● Used wheels

● Bent wheels that have been straightened

■ Wheel precautions

● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrench designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 100 miles (160 km).

● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

466

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (except for spare tire) that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (

→

P. 453)

CAUTION

■ When replacing wheels

● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■ When installing the wheel nuts

Tapered portion

● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered end facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered end facing outward can cause wheel to break and eventually cause a wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

467

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your

Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your

Toyota dealer.

● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

468

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Air c ondit ioning filt e r

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

■ Removal method

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

Open the glove box.

Slide off the damper.

Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

469

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Open the filter door.

Remove the filter.

■ Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

When installing the filter, follow the instructions indicated on the label.

470

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

471

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Wire le ss re m ot e c ont rol ba t t e r y

∗

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

■ You will need the following items:

Lithium battery CR2032

■ Replacing the battery

Remove the cover using a coin protected with tape etc.

Remove the discharged transmitter battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

∗

: If equipped

472

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ If the wireless remote control battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

● The wireless remote control will not function properly.

● The operational range is reduced.

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery

● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your

Toyota dealer.

● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION

■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■ For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.

● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

473

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Che c k ing a nd re pla c ing fuse s

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position.

The fuses are located in the following places. To check the fuses, follow the instructions below.

Engine compartment

Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Under the instrument panel

1.Open the auxiliary box.

2.Pull up the box and disengage the claws. Remove the stoppers from the cutouts and remove the box.

474

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” (

→

P. 477) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

475

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type B

Type C

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

476

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■ Engine compartment

Type A

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type B

477

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

1 A/C

Fuse

TOWING TAIL

FR FOG

7 OBD

8 BATT CHG

9 AI VALVE

10 TOWING

11 TRN-HAZ

12 RADIO NO.2

13 HEAD (LO RH)

14 HEAD (LO LH)

15 HEAD (HI RH)

16 HEAD (HI LH)

STOP

TOWING BRK

EFI NO.2

ETCS

7.5 A

30 A

10 A

30 A

15 A

30 A

10 A

Ampere

10 A

30 A

15 A

10 A

30 A

10 A

7.5 A

Circuit

Air conditioning system

Trailer lights (tail lights)

Front fog lights

Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, vehicle stability control system, anti-lock brake system, shift lock system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, towing lights

Trailer brake controller

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

On-board diagnosis system

Trailer sub battery

AI system

Towing lights

Turn signal lights, emergency flashers, meter and gauge

Audio system

Right-hand headlight (low beam), front fog lights

Left-hand headlight (low beam)

Right-hand headlight (high beam)

Left-hand headlight (high beam), meter and gauge

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control system

Charging system

478

18 ALT-S

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

19 EFI

20 HORN

21 A/F HEATER

ECU-B

DOME

RADIO NO.1

STA

Spare

J/B

29 AM1

30 HEATER

31 ABS NO.1

Ampere

20 A

10 A

15 A

7.5 A

10 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

50 A

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Horn

Circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Wireless remote control system, air conditioning system, multiplex communication system, meter and gauge, front passenger occupant classification system, garage door opener

Interior light, personal lights, clock, vanity lights

Audio system

Starting system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, meter and gauge, clutch start cancel switch

Spare fuse

TAIL, AC SKT, DR LCK, D FR P/W,

D RR P/W, P FR P/W and P RR

P/W fuses

ACC, IG1, IG1 NO.2, WIP, WSH,

4WD, BKUP LP and STA fuses

A/C fuse, air conditioning system

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system

479

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

AM2

A/PUMP

ABS NO.2

AC SKT

ALT

Ampere

30 A

50 A

30 A

100 A

120 A*

140 A*

Circuit

IGN and GAUGE fuses, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system

Power outlets

AM1, AC SKT, HEATER, FR FOG,

STOP, OBD, J/B, TOWING TAIL,

TOWING BRK and BATT CHG fuses

*: Replace the fuse with one of the same ampere rating as the original

480

■ Under the instrument panel

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

IGN

Fuse

GAUGE

TAIL

4 ACC

5 PWR OUTLET

6 DR LCK

Ampere

15 A

7.5 A

10 A

7.5 A

15 A

20 A

Circuit

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, anti-lock brake system, traction control system, vehicle stability control system, SRS airbag system, front passenger occupant classification system

Meter and gauge, emergency flashers

Tail lights, license plate lights, parking lights, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, instrument panel light control, illuminations

Shift lock system, outside rear view mirrors, audio system, power outlets

Power outlets

Door lock system

481

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

IG1 NO.2

8 BKUP LP

9 IG1

10 P RR P/W

11 P FR P/W

12 WSH

13 D RR P/W

14 4WD

15 WIP

16 D FR P/W

Ampere

10 A

20 A

10 A

20 A

30 A

Circuit

Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, stop lights, charging system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, air conditioning system, instrument panel light control, anti-glare inside rear view mirror, back monitor, clutch start cancel switch, rear differential lock system, power outlets, tire pressure warning system

Trailer lights (back-up lights)

Back-up lights, air conditioning system, shift lock system, audio system

Rear passenger’s power window

(right side)

Front passenger’s power window

Wipers and washer

Rear passenger’s power window

(left side)

Four-wheel drive system, rear differential lock system

Wipers and washer

Power windows

482

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced

● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (

→

P. 484)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer.

■ If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION

■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

NOTICE

■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

483

4 -3 . Do-it -yourse lf m a int e na nc e

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your

Toyota dealer.

■ Prepare a replacement light bulb

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (

→

P. 568)

■ Front bulb locations

Front turn signal lights/parking lights/daytime running lights

(if equipped)

Headlights Front side marker lights

Front fog lights

(if equipped)

484

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Rear bulb locations

High mounted stoplight

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

(bulb type only)

Replacing light bulbs

■ Headlights

Unplug the connector.

485

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the rubber cover.

Release the bulb retaining spring.

Remove the bulb.

To install a new bulb, align the tabs of the bulb with the cutouts of the mounting hole.

486

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front fog lights (if equipped)

Unplug the connector while pulling the lock release.

Turn the bulb counterclockwise.

487

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front side marker lights

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

488

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Front turn signal lights/parking lights/daytime running lights

(if equipped)

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

489

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Stop/tail lights, rear side marker lights (bulb type only), backup lights and rear turn signal lights

Remove the bolts and rear combination assembly.

Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.

Turn the bulb bases counterclockwise.

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights (bulb type only)

Back-up light

Remove the light bulb.

Rear turn signal light

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights (bulb type only)

Back-up light

490

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ High mounted stoplight

Remove the screws and cover.

Remove the light bulbs.

491

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ License plate lights

Remove the screw and light unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

492

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Lights other than the above

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

• Side turn signal lights (if equipped)

• Stop/tail lights (LED type)

• Rear side marker lights (LED type)

■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

● Water has built up inside the headlight.

■ LED light bulbs

The side turn signal lights (if equipped), stop/tail and rear side marker lights

(LED type) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

If two or more LEDs in a stop light burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws (SAE).

CAUTION

■ Replacing light bulbs

● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■ To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

493

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

494

5 -1 . Esse nt ia l inform a t ion

Em e rge nc y fla she rs

Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is involved in an accident.

Press the switch to flash all the turn signal lights. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

NOTICE

■ To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

496

5 -1 . Esse nt ia l inform a t ion

I f your ve hicle ne e ds t o be t ow e d

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing (4WD models and PreRunner only)

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet/hook. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Type A

Towing eyelet

497

5-1. Essential information

Type B

Towing hook

■ Emergency towing procedure

The engine switch must be in the ACC (engine off) or the ON

(engine running) position.

4WD models: Put the front-wheel drive control switch in H2.

Put the shift lever in N.

Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

■ Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet/hook and the cables or chains.

Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

498

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE

■ Emergency towing eyelet/hook precautions

● Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet/hook is not broken or damaged.

● Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet/hook.

● Do not jerk the eyelet/hook. Apply steady and even force.

● To avoid damaging the eyelet/hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

■ To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

499

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the front

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

2WD models with a manual transmission: We recommend to use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

When not using a towing dolly, release the parking brake and shift the shift lever to N.

4WD models with a manual transmission: We recommend to use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

When not using a towing dolly, release the parking brake, shift the shift lever to N and put the front-wheel drive control switch in

H2.

NOTICE

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.

500

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck from the rear

2WD models

Turn the engine switch to the

ACC position.

4WD models

We recommend to use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When not using a towing dolly, turn the engine switch to the ACC position, shift the shift lever to N and put the front-wheel drive control switch in H2.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle

● Do not tow the vehicle with the key removed or in the LOCK position.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.

● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

501

5-1. Essential information

Using a flat bed truck

Front

If your Toyota is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

Apply the parking brake firmly.

502

5 -1 . Esse nt ia l inform a t ion

I f you t hink som e t hing is w rong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Visible symptoms

● Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

■ Audible symptoms

● Changes in exhaust sound

● Excessive tire squeal when cornering

● Strange noises related to the suspension system

● Pinging or other noises related to the engine

■ Operational symptoms

● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

● Appreciable loss of power

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

503

5 -1 . Esse nt ia l inform a t ion

Fue l pum p shut off syst e m

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

■ Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

504

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

If a w arning light turns on or a w arning buzzer sounds...

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])

505

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low*.

*: The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must be checked using the engine oil level dipstick.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system;

• The electronic automatic transmission control system; or

• Emission control system.

506

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light Warning light/Details

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

(Canada)

(Flashes)

(Flashes or comes on)

Slip indicator

The indicator comes on to indicate a malfunction in:

• The VSC;

• The TRAC;

• The active traction control system (if equipped);

• The AUTO LSD system;

• The downhill assist control system (if equipped);

• The hill-start assist control system (if equipped); or

• The Trailer Sway Control (if equipped).

Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped)

• Comes on: Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

• Flashes: Indicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission system

507

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light

(On the instrument cluster)

(On the center panel)

Warning light/Details

Open door warning light

Indicates that a door is not fully closed.

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)

Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

Correction procedure

Check that all doors are closed.

Fasten the seat belt.

508

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

Warning light/Details

Tire pressure warning light

Correction procedure

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure such as

• Natural causes

(

→

P. 510)

• Flat tire (

P. 515)

• When the light stays on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. (

→

P. 511)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes.

In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

Have the system checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Low fuel level warning light

Low level of fuel.

Refuel the vehicle.

Engine oil replacement reminder light

• Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 15 seconds: Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed.

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.

• Comes on and remains:

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.

Check and change the engine oil.

509

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

: Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that their seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON or START position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. The buzzer sounds once if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds elapse, the buzzer will sound intermittently for approximately 10 seconds, followed by a different tone for approximately 20 more seconds.

■ Key reminder buzzer

The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed (with the engine switch in the ACC or LOCK position and the driver’s door opened).

■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

● Is your vehicle low on gas?

If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its weight, the reminder light to flash and buzzer to sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

510

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the temporary spare tire. Replace the temporary spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few minutes.

■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative

The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm

or bar) or higher.

The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.

● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

● If tire chains are used.

■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to the ON position, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

511

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (

→

P. 441)

■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.

(Customizable features

→

P. 583)

CAUTION

■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.

If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

■ Maintenance of the tire

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

512

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Maintenance of the tire

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

513

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

514

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f you ha ve a fla t t ire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

■ Before jacking up the vehicle

● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

● Set the parking brake.

● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).

● Stop the engine.

● Turn on the emergency flashers.

■ Location of the spare tire

■ Location of the jack and tools

Regular Cab models

Jack

Tool bag

515

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Access Cab models

Tool bag

Jack

Double Cab models

Tool bag

Jack

Taking out the jack and tool bag

Regular Cab models with bench type seat

Pull the lever and fold down the seatback.

516

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Regular Cab models with separated type seat

Pull the lever and fold down the seatback.

Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag.

Loosen and remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

517

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Access Cab models

Pull up the lever.

Raise the bottom cushion up.

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

Press the lid against the bottom of the lower cushion until it is supported by the hookand-loop fastener.

Make sure that the lid is supported to prevent it from closing unexpectedly.

Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag.

518

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Loosen and remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Double Cab models

Swing the bottom cushion up by pulling the lock release strap.

Turn the knob counterclockwise.

Open the lid.

Unhook the strap and remove the tool bag.

519

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Loosen and remove the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Assemble the jack handle (in the tool bag)

Assemble the jack handle extension as shown.

Taking out the spare tire

Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the lowering screw and turn it counterclockwise.

520

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

After the tire is lowered completely to the ground, remove the holding bracket.

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Flat tire

Front

Rear

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Lefthand side

Righthand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear righthand side tire

Behind the rear lefthand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

521

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Remove the wheel ornament using the wheel nut wrench as shown.

To protect the wheel and wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament, as shown in the illustration.

Type A

Type B

Type C

522

Front

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

Assemble the jack handle extension as shown.

Position the jack at the correct jack point as shown.

Front

Rear

Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid place.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

When positioning the jack under the rear axle housing, make sure the groove on the top of the jack fits with the rear axle housing.

523

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Installing the tire

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel

Tapered portion

Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

Disc wheel sheet

524

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel

Tapered portion

Tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

Disc wheel sheet

Replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel

Washer

Tighten the nuts until the washer of the nut comes into loose contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel

Lower the vehicle.

525

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

2WD models except PreRunner

4WD models and PreRunner

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

Lay down the tire with the outer side facing up, and install the holding bracket.

526

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4WD models only: Fasten the claws of the holding bracket into the wheel holes as shown in the illustration.

Holding bracket

Claw

Then secure the tire, taking care that the tire goes straight up without catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or sudden braking.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

■ After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

→

P. 453)

■ When using the temporary spare tire

As the temporary spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the temporary spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

527

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Using the jack

Improper use of the jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

● Do not use the jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

● Only use the jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

● Always check that the jack is securely set to the jack point.

● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle will be injured.

■ Using the jack handle

Tighten all the screws securely to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

■ Replacing a flat tire

● Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:

• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the vehicle.

• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

528

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Replacing a flat tire

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 83 ft·lbf (113

N·m, 11.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (

→

P. 467)

■ When using the temporary spare tire

● Remember that your temporary spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your temporary spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use two temporary spare tires simultaneously.

● Replace the temporary spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

529

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Speed limit when using the temporary spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a temporary spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■ Driving with tire chains and the temporary spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the temporary spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■ When the spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

● ABS & Brake assist

● VSC

● TRAC

● Active traction control system (if equipped)

● Hill-start assist control system (if equipped)

● Downhill assist control system (if equipped)

● AUTO LSD system

● Cruise control (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:

● 4WD system

530

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

■ When stowing the flat tire

Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.

■ When replacing the tires

● Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

→

P. 453)

531

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f t he e ngine w ill not st a r t

If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting procedure (

→

P. 143) or releasing the steering lock (

→

P. 144), confirm the following points.

■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

● The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures.

● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(

→

P. 84)

■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● The battery may be discharged. (

→

P. 535)

● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (

→

P. 535)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

532

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the ACC or ON position.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

533

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f you lose your ke ys

New genuine Toyota keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

534

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f t he ve hicle ba t t e r y is disc ha rge d

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

535

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

536

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■ Avoiding a discharged battery

● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■ Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

CAUTION

■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

537

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery.

● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the battery.

● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■ To prevent damaging the vehicle (vehicles with a manual transmission)

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

■ When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

538

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f your ve hicle ove rhe a t s

If your engine overheats:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the engine.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and call your local Toyota dealer.

539

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The engine has cooled down sufficiently.

The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates C.

Check the engine coolant level.

Look for obvious coolant leaks from the radiator, hoses and under the vehicle.

Note that water draining from the air conditioning is normal if it has been used.

Add engine coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (

→

P. 559)

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

540

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.

● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

● Steam is coming from under the hood.

CAUTION

■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injury such as burns.

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is running.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

NOTICE

■ When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

541

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f t he ve hicle be c om e s st uc k

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N

(vehicles with a manual transmission).

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

Restart the engine.

Turn off the VSC. (

→

P. 202, 203)

Shift the shift lever to D or R (automatic transmission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

CAUTION

■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.

The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■ When shifting the shift lever

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

542

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

543

5 -2 . St e ps t o t a k e in a n e m e rge nc y

I f your ve hicle ha s t o be st oppe d in a n e m e rge ncy

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the ACC position.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

544

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION

■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving

● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.

Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

● Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

545

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

546

6 -1 . Spe c ific a t ions

M a int e na nc e da t a (fue l, oil leve l, e t c .)

Dimensions

2WD models except PreRunner

Cab type Regular Cab

Access Cab

Except

X-Runner

Double Cab

Overall length

190.4 in.

(4835 mm)

208.1 in. (5285 mm)

Overall width

Overall height*

Wheelbase

72.2 in. (1835 mm)

65.8 in.

(1670 mm)

109.6 in.

(2785 mm)

66.1 in.

(1680 mm)

74.0 in.

(1880 mm)

65.6 in.

(1665 mm)

127.4 in. (3235 mm)

74.6 in.

(1895 mm)

66.1 in.

(1680 mm)

Front tread

Rear tread

61.0 in. (1550 mm)

62.2 in.

(1580 mm)

62.2 in.

(1580 mm)

: Unladen vehicle

4WD models and PreRunner (except Regular Cab models)

61.0 in.

(1550 mm)

61.0 in.

(1550 mm)

Cab type

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height*

Wheelbase

Front tread

Rear tread

: Unladen vehicle

Regular Cab Access Cab

190.4 in. (4835 mm) 208.1 in. (5285 mm)

74.6 in. (1895 mm)

69.9 in. (1775 mm)

109.6 in. (2785 mm)

70.3 in. (1785 mm)

127.4 in. (3235 mm)

63.0 in. (1600 mm)

63.4 in. (1610 mm)

548

6-1. Specifications

Cab type

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height*

Wheelbase

Front tread

Rear tread

* : Unladen vehicle

Double Cab

With short deck

208.1 in. (5285 mm)

With long deck

221.3 in. (5620 mm)

74.6 in. (1895 mm)

70.1 in. (1780 mm)

127.4 in. (3235 mm) 140.6 in. (3570 mm)

63.0 in. (1600 mm)

63.4 in. (1610 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight

2WD models except PreRunner

Cab type Engine Deck type

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupant + luggage)

Regular Cab

Access Cab

Double Cab

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

Long deck

1150 lb. (520 kg)

1050 lb. (475 kg)

850 lb. (385 kg)

950 lb. (430 kg)

: Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory increases vehicle weight, thereby reducing vehicle capacity weight. Contact your

Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.

549

6-1. Specifications

PreRunner

Cab type Engine Deck type

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupant

+ luggage)

Access Cab

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

Long deck

1300 lb. (585 kg)

1250 lb. (565 kg)

1300 lb. (585 kg)

Double Cab

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

Short deck

Long deck

1150 lb. (520 kg)

: Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory increases vehicle weight, thereby reducing vehicle capacity weight. Contact your

Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.

4WD models

Cab type Engine Deck type

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupant

+ luggage) *

Regular Cab

Access Cab

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

Long deck

1300 lb. (585 kg)

1200 lb. (540 kg)

1150 lb. (520 kg)

Double Cab

4.0 L V6

(1GR-FE) engine

Short deck

Long deck

1050 lb. (475 kg)

* : Installing accessories in addition to those installed at the factory increases vehicle weight, thereby reducing vehicle capacity weight. Contact your

Toyota dealer about the weight of accessory parts.

550

6-1. Specifications

TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

Regular Cab models

Model code * 1

TRN220L-TRMDKA

TRN220L-TRPDKA

TRN240L-TRMDKA

TRN240L-TRPDKA

Engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

Driving system

2WD

4WD

TWR

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

Access Cab models

Model code

* 1

Engine

TRN225L-CRMDKA

TRN225L-CRPDKA

TRN245L-CRMDKA

TRN245L-CRPDKA

TRN265L-CRPDKA

GRN225L-CRFDKA

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

GRN245L-CRADKA

GRN245L-CRFDKA

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Driving system

2WD

4WD

2WD

4WD

GRN265L-CRADKA 2WD

TWR

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

3300 lb. (1495 kg)

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg) * 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg) * 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg)

* 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg)

* 3

551

6-1. Specifications

Double Cab models

Model code

* 1

Engine

Driving system

TWR

TRN225L-PRPDKA

TRN265L-PRPDKA

GRN245L-PRADKA

GRN245L-PRFDKA

GRN250L-PRADKA

GRN265L-PRADKA

GRN270L-PRADKA

2.7 L 4-cylinder

(2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

2WD

4WD

2WD

3400 lb. (1540 kg)

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg)

* 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg) * 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6400 lb. (2900 kg)

* 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg) * 3

3500 lb. (1585 kg)

* 2

6500 lb. (2945 kg)

* 3

* 1

: The model code is indicated on the Certification Label. (

→

P. 553)

* 2

: Without towing package

* 3

: With towing package

552

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

■ Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

Regular Cab and Double Cab models

This number is also on the

Certification Label.

Access Cab models

This number is also on the

Certification Label.

553

6-1. Specifications

■ Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

554

6-1. Specifications

Engine

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Valve clearance

(engine cold)

　 Intake

　 Exhaust

2TR-FE

4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.74

3.74 in. (95.0

95.0 mm)

164.3 cu.in.

(2694 cm

)

Automatic adjustment

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Valve clearance

(engine cold)

　 Intake

　 Exhaust

1GR-FE

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

3.70

3.74 in. (94.0

95.0 mm)

241.4 cu.in.

(3956 cm

)

Automatic adjustment

0.006

⎯

0.010 in. (0.15

⎯

0.25 mm)

0.011

⎯

0.015 in. (0.29

⎯

0.39 mm)

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane rating

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Unleaded gasoline only

87 (Research octane number 91) or higher

21.1 gal. (80.0 L, 17.6 lmp.gal.)

555

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill - reference

)

Without filter 2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

5.4 qt. (5.1 L, 4.5 Imp.qt.)

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

2WD models except PreRunner:

4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp.qt.)

4WD models and PreRunner:

5.2 qt. (4.9 L, 4.3 Imp.qt.)

With filter 2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

6.1 qt. (5.8 L, 5.1 Imp.qt.)

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

2WD models except PreRunner:

4.8 qt. (4.5 L, 4.0 Imp.qt.)

4WD models and PreRunner:

5.5 qt. (5.2 L, 4.6 Imp.qt.)

: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging.

Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

556

6-1. Specifications

■ Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use

Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

SAE 0W-20

Outside temperature

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available,

SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.

However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

● The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

557

6-1. Specifications

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

SAE 5W-30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 5W-30 is not available,

SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.

However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):

● The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

● The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

558

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Coolant type

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

9.1 qt. (8.6 L, 7.6 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

9.2 qt. (8.7 L, 7.7 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with an automatic transmission

10.1 qt. (9.6 L, 8.4 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with a manual transmission

10.3 qt. (9.7 L, 8.5 Imp.qt.)

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

Make DENSO

Gap

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Make DENSO

NGK

Gap

SK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

K20HR-U11

LFR6C11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs (2.7 L 4-cylinder [2TR-FE] engine only)

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

559

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage at

F (20

C):

Charging rates

12.6

⎯

12.8 V Fully charged

12.2

⎯

12.4 V Half charged

11.8

⎯

12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights turned off)

5 A max.

Differential

Front

(4WD models)

1.59 qt. (1.50 L, 1.32 Imp.qt.)

Oil capacity

Rear

Oil type and viscosity

2WD models except PreRunner

3.66 qt. (3.46 L, 3.04 Imp.qt.)

4WD models and PreRunner

3.12 qt. (2.95 L, 2.60 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT

75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

* : Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

560

6-1. Specifications

Automatic transmission

4-speed models

Fluid capacity *

Fluid type

10.8 qt. (10.2 L, 9.0 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF Type T-IV

5-speed models

Fluid capacity *

Vehicles without towing package

11.3 qt. (10.7 L, 9.4 Imp.qt.)

Vehicles with towing package

11.5 qt. (10.9 L, 9.6 Imp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS Fluid type

: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ Automatic transmission fluid type (4-speed models)

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF Type

T-IV” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

■ Automatic transmission fluid type (5-speed models)

Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

561

6-1. Specifications

Manual transmission

Gear oil capacity (Reference)

2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

Gear oil type

Recommended gear oil viscosity

2WD models

2.7 qt. (2.6 L, 2.3 Imp.qt.)

4WD models

2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp.qt.)

1.9 qt. (1.8 L, 1.6 Imp.qt.)

Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

SAE 75W-90

Clutch

Clutch free play

Fluid type

Transfer (4WD models)

Oil capacity

Oil type

Recommended oil viscosity

0.2

⎯

0.6 in. (5

⎯

15 mm)

FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp.qt.)

Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5

SAE 75W-90

562

6-1. Specifications

Brakes

Pedal clearance

* 1

2WD models except

PreRunner

4WD models

Pedal free play

Brake pad wear limit

Brake lining wear limit

Parking brake pedal travel

* 2

(pedal type)

Parking brake lever travel

* 3

(lever type)

Fluid type

4.3 in. (110 mm)

4.2 in. (106 mm)

Without off-road package

4.2 in. (106 mm)

With off-road package

3.4 in. (88 mm)

0.04

⎯

0.24 in. (1

⎯

6 mm)

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

7 — 10 clicks

FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703

* 1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,

50 kgf) with the engine running.

* 2

: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,

30.6 kgf).

* 3

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled with a force of 44.9 lbf (200 N, 20.4

kgf).

Chassis lubrication (4WD models and PreRunner with 2.7L

4-cylinder [2TR-FE] engine only)

Propeller shafts Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

563

6-1. Specifications

Steering

Free play

Power steering fluid type

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

II or

III

Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P215/70R15 97S

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire * :

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

6 J, 15

6 JJ

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

* : If you affix the spare tire to a front position, please make sure to adjust the tire to the correct inflation pressure as soon as possible.

564

6-1. Specifications

Type B

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P245/75R16 109S

Front tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire:

30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

7 J, 16

7 JJ

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

Type C

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

P265/70R16 111T

Front tires:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire * :

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

7 JJ Wheel size

Wheel nut torque 83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

: If you affix the spare tire to a front position, please make sure to adjust the tire to the correct inflation pressure as soon as possible.

565

6-1. Specifications

Type D

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

Type E

Tire size

P265/65R17 110S

Front tires:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

7 1/2 JJ

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P255/45R18 99V

Front tires:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire:

35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 4 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

8 JJ

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

566

6-1. Specifications

Type F

Tire size

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

P265/60R18 109H

Front tires:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Rear tires:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Spare tire:

29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 3 psi (20 kPa, 0.2 kgf/cm

2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

7 1/2 J

83 ft·lbf (113 N·m, 11.5 kgf·m)

567

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Light Bulbs

Headlights

Front fog lights

* 1

Front side marker lights

Front turn signal lights/parking lights/ daytime running lights * 1

Rear turn signal lights

Stop/tail and rear side marker lights

* 2

Back-up lights

Interior

License plate lights

High mounted stoplight

Interior light

Personal lights

* 1

: If equipped

* 2

: Bulb type only

A: HB2 halogen bulbs

B: H11 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

E: Double end bulbs

Bulb No.

—

4157

NAK

3157A

3157KX

921

168

—

168

60/55

27/8

Type

568

6 -1 . Spe c ific a t ions

Fue l infor m a t ion

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

■ If your engine knocks

● Consult your Toyota dealer.

● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

■ Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.

569

6-1. Specifications

■ Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

■ Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■ Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than

10% ethanol.

(15% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled

E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

● If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

570

6-1. Specifications

■ Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT

(Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

NOTICE

■ Notice on fuel quality

● Do not use improper fuels.

If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol.

It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

571

6 -1 . Spe c ific a t ions

T ire infor m a t ion

Typical tire symbols

572

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

Tire ply composition and materials

(

→

P. 574)

P. 573)

P. 452)

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

→

P. 577)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (

→

P. 577)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

6-1. Specifications

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

Summer tire or all season tire (

→

P. 456)

An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol *

Tire Identification Number

(TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

* :The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

573

6-1. Specifications

Tire size

■ Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

■ Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

574

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the

U.S.A. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■ DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety

Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

575

6-1. Specifications

■ Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■ Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering

(turning) traction.

■ Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

576

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

577

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Normal occupant weight

Occupant distribution

Production options weight

Rim

Meaning

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 * that follows

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.

(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1 * below), and dividing by two

578

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

Extra load tire

Groove

Innerliner

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

579

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Passenger car tire

Meaning

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b)The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less

580

6-1. Specifications

Ply

Tire related term

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Snow tire

Test rim

Meaning

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-

1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in

ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for

Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

581

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators(TWI)

Wheel-holding fixture

Meaning

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

:Table 1

⎯

Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

582

6 -2 . Cust om iza t ion

Cust om iza ble fe a t ure s

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Toyota dealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Customizing inside rear view mirror features (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

For information displayed on the inside rear view mirror, it is possible to change the units displayed for outside temperature, the position of the outside temperature and compass displays, the color of the display, and the displayed language.

When customizing vehicle features, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a safe place with the parking brake set and the shift lever in P

(automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

■ Changing the position of the outside temperature and compass displays

Type A: Press and hold

Menu”.

to display “Custom Settings

Type B: Press to display “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Display”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Display”, then press

583

6-2. Customization

Type A: Press

“Layout”.

Type B: Press

“Layout”.

and select

Type A: Press and hold and choose whether outside temperature or compass display will appear on top.

Type B: Press and choose whether outside temperature or compass display will appear on top.

To leave the “Custom Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

■ Changing the display color of the outside temperature and compass displays

to display the “Custom

Settings Menu”.

Type B: Press to display the “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Display”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Display”, then press

Type A: Press

“Color”.

Type B: Press

“Color”.

and select

584

6-2. Customization

Type A: Each time is pressed and held, the display colors change in the following order:

“Green”

→

“White”

→

“Orange”

→

“Blue”

Type B: Each time is pressed, the display colors change in the following order:

“Green”

→

“White”

→

“Orange”

→

“Blue”

To leave the “Custom Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

■ To change the display language

to display the “Custom

Settings Menu”.

Type B: Press to display the “Custom Settings Menu”.

Type A: Press and select

“Display”, then press and hold .

Type B: Press and select

“Display”, then press

Type A: Press

“Language”.

and select

Type B: Press

“Language”.

and select

Type A: Each time is pressed and held, the display language changes in the following order:

“English”

→

“French”

→

“Spanish”

Type B: Each time is pressed, the display language changes in the following order:

“English”

→

“French”

→

“Spanish”

585

6-2. Customization

To leave the “Custom Settings Menu”, select “Back to main menu” to return to the starting screen, then either select “Exit” or wait several seconds without pressing any buttons.

Customizable features

Default setting

Customized setting

Item

Wireless remote control

(

→

P. 36)

Seat Belt

Reminder

Buzzer

(

→

P. 508)

Function

Operation signal

(Buzzer)

Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer

OFF

586

6 -2 . Cust om iza t ion

I t e m s t o init ia lize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is performed on the vehicle.

Item

Engine oil maintenance data

When to initialize

After changing engine oil

Tire pressure warning system

• When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

• When changing the tire size.

Reference

P. 441

P. 453

587

6-2. Customization

588

Re por t ing sa fe t y de fe c t s for U.S. ow ne rs

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:

1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safer-

car.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave,

S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

590

Seat belt instructions for Canadian ow ners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in

English.

591

592

SRS airba g instructions for Canadian ow ners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

593

594

595

596

597

598

599

600

590

601

602

603

Ca m pe r infor m a t ion

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulation issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on truck-camper loading. Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

Center of gravity location

The figures given in the illustration indicate the recommended center of gravity zone.

Recommended location for cargo center of gravity for cargo weight rating

Rear end of truck bed

Regular Cab models

Access Cab models

Except X-Runner

X-Runner

Double Cab models

With short deck

With long deck

49.9 in. (1267 mm)

—

45.6 in. (1157 mm)

35.9 in. (911 mm)

36.1 in. (917 mm)

—

31.8 in. (807 mm)

27.8 in. (706 mm)

: Truck-campers cannot be used with the X-Runner since it is not designed for them.

604

CAUTION

■ Loading precaution

If a load is too far back, it can cause dangerous handling. If it is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded.

Cargo weight rating and proper matching

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper.

The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of gravity should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity zone when installed.

Camper center of gravity

Recommended center of gravity location zone

■ Cargo weight rating

Regular Cab models

3 people, 2TR-FE engine, 2WD:

2 people, 2TR-FE engine, 4WD:

3 people, 2TR-FE engine, 4WD:

700 lb. (317 kg)

1000 lb. (453 kg)

850 lb. (385 kg)

605

Access Cab models

2 people, 2TR-FE engine, 2WD except PreRunner:

750 lb. (340 kg)

4 people, 2TR-FE engine, 2WD except PreRunner:

450 lb. (204 kg)

2 people, 2TR-FE engine, PreRunner:

4 people, 2TR-FE engine, PreRunner:

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

4 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

1000 lb. (453 kg)

700 lb. (317 kg)

950 lb. (430 kg)

650 lb. (294 kg)

2 people, 2TR-FE engine, 4WD:

4 people, 2TR-FE engine, 4WD:

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

4 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

900 lb. (408 kg)

600 lb. (272 kg)

850 lb. (385 kg)

550 lb. (249 kg)

Double Cab models with short deck

2 people, 2TR-FE engine, 2WD except PreRunner:

650 lb. (294 kg)

5 people, 2TR-FE engine, 2WD except PreRunner:

200 lb. (90 kg)

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

5 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

5 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

850 lb. (385 kg)

400 lb. (181 kg)

750 lb. (340 kg)

300 lb. (136 kg)

Double Cab models with long deck

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

5 people, 1GR-FE engine, PreRunner:

2 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

5 people, 1GR-FE engine, 4WD:

850 lb. (385 kg)

400 lb. (181 kg)

750 lb. (340 kg)

300 lb. (136 kg)

CAUTION

■ Overloading

Be careful — overloading can cause dangerous braking and handling problems, and can damage your vehicle and its tires.

606

Gross axle and vehicle weight ratings

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh on the front and on the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label which is located on the door latch post on the left side of the vehicle. (

→

P. 553) If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Gross axle weight rating

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

Gross vehicle weight rating

Not exceed GVWR

607

■ GAWR

GAWR

Front Rear

2WD models except PreRunner

2380 lb. (1075 kg) 2650 lb. (1200 kg)

4WD models and

PreRunner

2755 lb. (1245 kg)

Regular Cab models

3000 lb. (1360 kg)

Access Cab and

Double Cab models

3110 lb. (1410 kg)

■ GVWR

2WD models except PreRunner

Cab type

Regular Cab

Access Cab

Double Cab

GVWR

4650 lb. (2105 kg)

Vehicles with 2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

4900 lb. (2220 kg)

Vehicles with 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

4700 lb. (2130 kg)

4900 lb. (2220 kg)

608

PreRunner

Cab type

Access Cab

Double Cab

4WD models

Cab type

Regular Cab

Access Cab

Double Cab

GVWR

Vehicles with 2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

5250 lb. (2380 kg)

Vehicles with 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

5400 lb. (2445 kg)

GVWR

5100 lb. (2310 kg)

Vehicles with 2.7 L 4-cylinder (2TR-FE) engine

5350 lb. (2425 kg)

Vehicles with 4.0 L V6 (1GR-FE) engine

5500 lb. (2490 kg)

609

610

Abbre via t ion list

Abbrevia t ion/Ac ronym list

ABBREVIATIONS

2WD

4WD

ABS

ACC

ALR

A-TRAC

AUTO LSD

CRS

DAC

ECU

EDR

ELR

GAWR

GCWR

GVWR

I/M

LATCH

LED

M + S

MMT

MTBE

OBD

RES

RR DIFF LOCK

RSCA

SRS

612

MEANING

Two Wheel Drive

Four Wheel Drive

Anti-Lock Brake System

Accessory

Automatic Locking Retractor

Active Traction Control

Automatic Limited Slip Differential

Child Restraint System

Downhill assist control

Electronic Control Unit

Event Data Recorder

Emergency Locking Retractor

Gross Axle Weight Rating

Gross Combination Weight Rating

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

Emission inspection and maintenance

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

Light Emitting Diode

Light truck

Mud + Snow

Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether

On Board Diagnostics

Resume

Rear differential lock

Roll sensing of curtain shield airbag

Supplemental Restraint System

ABBREVIATIONS

TIN

TPMS

TRAC

TWI

TWR

VIN

VSC

MEANING

Tire Identification Number

Tire Pressure Warning System

Traction Control

Treadwear indicators

Trailer Weight Rating

Vehicle Identification Number

Vehicle Stability Control

Abbreviation list

613

Wha t t o do if...

Wha t t o do if...

A tire punctures P. 515 If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

The shift lever cannot be moved out

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

P. 532

P. 84

P. 535

If the engine will not start

Engine immobilizer system

If the vehicle battery is discharged

P. 533

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 539 If your vehicle overheats

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

The key is lost P. 534 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out P. 535 If the vehicle battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 39

P. 43

Side doors

Access doors

P. 542 If the vehicle becomes stuck

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

The warning light or indicator light comes on

624

P. 505 If a warning light turns on

■ Instrument cluster

■ Center panel

What to do if...

625

What to do if...

■ Warning lights

Brake system warning light

Slip indicator*

P. 507 or or

Charging system warning light P. 506

Low engine oil pressure warning light P. 506

Malfunction indicator lamp

P. 505

Cruise control indicator light*

P. 507

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light P. 507

Open door warning light

P. 508

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

P. 508

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light P. 508 P. 506

SRS warning light

P. 507

Tire pressure warning light P. 509

ABS warning light Low fuel level warning light P. 509 or

P. 507

:Slip indicator comes on.

:The indicator flashes to indicate a malfunction.

Engine oil replacement reminder light P. 509

626

M e m o

627

GAS STAT I ON I N FORM AT I ON

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 434

Fuel filler door

P. 81

628

Hood lock release lever

P. 434

Tire inflation pressure

P. 564

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill

-reference)

21.1 gal. (80.0 L, 17.6 Imp.gal.)

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

P. 564

Engine oil type

P. 556

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

P. 556

SAE 0W-20 (2.7 L 4-cylinder [2TR-FE] engine)

SAE 5W-30 (4.0 L V6 [1GR-FE] engine)

Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the Toyota 2012 Tacoma Owner's manual. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Before driving

When driving

Interior and exterior features

Maintenance and care

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

For owners

Index

Ke ys

Wire le ss re m ot e c ont rol

Side doors

Ac c e ss doors (Ac c e ss Ca b m ode ls only)

Ta ilga t e

Front se a t s

Re a r se at s (Ac c e ss Ca b a nd Double Ca b m ode ls)

H e a d re st ra int s

Se a t be lt s

St e e ring w he e l

Ant i-gla re inside re a r vie w m ir ror

Out side re a r vie w m ir rors

Pow e r w indow s

Ba c k w indow (ve hicle s w it h sliding t ype )

Ope ning t he fue l t a nk c a p

Engine im m obilize r syst e m

Cor re c t driving post ure

SRS a irba gs

Front pa sse nge r oc c upa nt cla ssific at ion syst e m

Child re st ra int syst e m s

I nst a lling c hild re st ra int s

Driving t he ve hicle

Engine (ignit ion) sw it c h

Aut om a t ic t ra nsm ission

∗

∗

M a nua l t ra nsm ission

∗

∗

Tur n signa l leve r

Pa rk ing bra ke

H or n

Ga uge s a nd m e t e rs

→

I ndic a t ors a nd w a r ning light s

H e a dlight sw it c h

Fog light sw it c h

Windshie ld w ipe rs a nd w a she r

Cruise c ont rol

Rear view monitor system (vehicles w ith auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

Four-w he e l drive syst e m

Ac t ive t ra c t ion c ont rol syst e m

AU TO LSD syst e m

Re a r diffe re nt ia l loc k syst e m

Dow nhill Assist Cont rol syst e m

Clut c h st a r t c a nc e l sw it c h

Driving a ssist syst e m s

Off-roa d pre c a ut ions (4WD mode ls a nd Pre Runne r)

Ca rgo a nd lugga ge

Ve hicle loa d lim it s

Wint e r driving t ips

Tra ile r t ow ing

Dinghy t ow ing

Air c ondit ioning syst e m

Audio syst e m t ype s

U sing t he ra dio

U sing t he CD pla ye r

Pla ying M P3 a nd WM A disc s

Ope ra t ing a n iPod

Ope ra t ing a U SB m e m or y

Opt im a l use of t he a udio syst e m

Operating the sub w oofer (on some Access Ca b models)

U sing t he AU X por t

U sing t he st e e ring w he e l a udio sw it c he s

De t a c ha ble pole a nt e nna

Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

U sing t he Blue t oot h

a udio syst e m

Ope rat ing a Blue t oot h

e na ble d por t a ble pla ye r